GETTING STARTED WITH WINMAX MILL

Dual Screen and Max Consoles

November 2012

704-0116-115

Revision B

The information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Hurco Companies, Inc. (Hurco). The software described in this document is furnished under the License Agreement to customers. It is against the law to copy the software on any medium except as specifically allowed in the license agreement. The purchaser may make copies of the software for backup purposes. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, for any purpose without the express written permission of the Hurco machine tool owner. Hurco Manufacturing Company reserves the right to incorporate any modification or improvements in machines and machine specifications which it considers necessary, and does not assume any obligation to make any said changes in machines or equipment previously sold. Hurco products and services are subject to Hurcos then current prices, terms, and conditions, which are subject to change without notice. 2012 Hurco Companies, Inc. All rights reserved. Patents: U.S. Patents B14,477,754; 5,453,933; Canadian Patent 1,102,434; Japanese Patents 1,649,006 and 1,375,124; other Patents pending. Hurco, Max, Ultimax, and WinMax are Registered Trademarks of Hurco Companies, Inc. AutoCAD, Autodesk, and DXF are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc. MS-DOS, Microsoft, and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Many of the designations used by manufacturers and sellers to distinguish their products are claimed as trademarks. Hurco has listed here all trademarks of which it is aware. For more information about Hurco products and services, contact: Hurco Companies, Inc. One Technology Way P.O. Box 68180 Indianapolis, IN 46268-0180 Tel (317) 293-5309 (products) (317) 298-2635 (service) Fax (317) 328-2812 (service) For Hurco subsidiary contact information, go to Hurcos Web site: www.hurco.com

- ii Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Getting Started with WinMax Mill Documentation Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console Buttons and Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programming and Operation Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the On-screen Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing the Programming Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine and Console Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WinMax Interface Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full Precision Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drop-down Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expand and Collapse Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sorting and Resizing Columns . . . . . . . . . . . Pop-ups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-screen Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing the WinMax Help in PDF format Control Panel Function Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency Stop Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programming Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Screen Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Screen Cursor Control Keys . . . . . . Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional Computer Keyboard . . . . . . . . . Axis, Spindle, and Machine Control . . . . . . . . . Override Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jog Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Jog Unit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . LCD Remote Jog Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine Operations Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS-232C Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indexer Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
704-0116-115

xi xi xi xiii xiii xiv 1 2 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 10 11 13 13 14 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 19 20 23 24 25 25 25 26 26 26 27 28 29 29

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Table of Contents -iii

USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Tool Changers . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Tool into the Spindle . . . . . . Unloading a Tool from the Spindle . . . . Loading Tools into the ATC Magazine . . Removing Tools from the ATC Magazine Large Tools in the ATC Magazine . . . . . Program Manager . . . . . . Managing Program Files Program Properties . . . Disk Operations . . . . . FTP Manager . . . . . . . .. . .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3

29 30 30 30 31 32 32 1 1 4 5 6 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 6 7 8 8 8 8 10 11 13 14 14 15 16 17 17 18 19 20 20 20 22 22 22 22 22 23 23 23 24 24 25 25 25

Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WinMax Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup Config & Machine Files . . . . . . . . . . . Restore Config & Machine Files . . . . . . . . . . . User Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversational Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NC Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Autosave Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Utilities and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Matching tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Life Monitoring tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant Delay Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable . . . . Alt Washdown Dwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alt Dwell Lt Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alt Washdown Off Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Washdown On Delay Timer . . . . . . . . . . . Washdown Off Delay Timer . . . . . . . . . . . Examples for Coolant Parameters Use . . . . Control Power Off Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disable Tool Picker Option . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable Dual Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cal to LS Velocity Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto Balance Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATC and Rapid Override Disable Parameters . . ATC Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rapid Override Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axis Safety Position Parameters . . . . . . . . . . Tilt Axis Safety Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-Axis and Y-Axis Safety Position . . . . . . . ATC Z-Axis Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position . . . . . . . Aux Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aux Output 1, 2, 3, 4 Confirmation Enable Disable Aux Out 1, 2, 3, 4 During Interrupt

- iv Table of Contents

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC . Chip Conveyor Parameters . . . . . . . . . Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable Chip Conveyor On Delay Time . . . . Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time . . . . Warm Up Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disable Auto On Chip Removal . . . . . . Axis Feedrate Override Min (%) . . . . . Rapid Feedrate Override Min (%) . . . . Dual Tool Probe Present . . . . . . . . . . . Enable Retract Z-Axis on Power Loss . . Estimated Run Time Parameters . . . . . . . . Serial Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FTP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WinMax Uptime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotary Axes Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Language Quick Toggle . . . . . . . . . . . Data Logging Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Path Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional Utilities Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part Program Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Information Printing . . . . . . . . . . Probing Data Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial Numbers Printing . . . . . . . . . . . Integrator Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . Serial I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active Error Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active Status Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files . . . . Export Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programming Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Erase Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part Setup Coordinate Systems . . Machine Coordinate System . . Unrotated Coordinate System Workpiece Coordinate System 5-Axis Part Setup Fields . . . . . . . Part Setup Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Read Out (DRO) . . . . . . . Part Setup Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . Part Fixturing and Tool Loading . . Work Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary Work Offsets . . . . . . Stock Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Calibration Modes . . . . . . . . . . Absolute Tool Length mode . . . . . Setup of Gauge Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4

26 26 26 26 26 29 29 29 30 30 30 31 32 33 33 33 34 34 34 35 35 35 35 36 38 38 38 39 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 1 2 2 3 5 5 5 5 7 9 11 12 13 13 14 15 17 17 18

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Table of Contents -v

Zero Calibration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Setup Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Setup Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feed and Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feed and Speed Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . Speed Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feed Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NC SFQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Apt Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Tool Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part Program Tool Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part Program Tool Review for NC Programs . . . . . Part Program Tool Review Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Matching Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool and Material Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Parameters 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Parameters 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Milling Parameters 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Milling Parameters 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Holes Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performance Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import / Export Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversational Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NC States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing NC States into Conversational Programs Import and Export Tool Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy and Change Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy, Move, or Delete Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Feeds, Speeds, and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . Change Surface Finish Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Review Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Safety Override Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CE Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering the Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing an Existing Access Code . . . . . . . . . Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphics Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axis Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolpath and Solid Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4

20 21 21 25 27 28 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 33 34 34 35 36 37 38 39 39 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 48 50 51 52 53 53 53 54 55 56 57 57 58 58 59 61 62 63 63 64 64 64 64 65 66

- vi Table of Contents

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Machine Operation Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrate Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Establishing Servo Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axes Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warm Up Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recovery and Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Function Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Rapid Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Tool Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VM Tool Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of Automatic Tool Changers (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-Taper ATC with 24- or 40-Station Tool Magazine . . . . . . ATC Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-Taper ATC with 30 or 32-Station Tool Magazine . . . . . . HMX and VTXU Tool Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMX Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VTXU Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATC and Machine Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMX Machine Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMX ATC Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMX ATC Status Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMX ATC Diagnostics Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VM, VMX, and VTXU ATC & Machine Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . ATC & Machine Diagnostics Input Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VM, VMX, and VTXU ATC & Machine Diagnostics Softkeys HMX Automatic Pallet Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Squaring the Pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating the APC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APC Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APC Status Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APC Diagnostics Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APC Jog Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating the APC from the Load Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APC Panel Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual APC Table Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-Zone Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part Programming for Dual-Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-Zone Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto Mode Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop Machine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Park Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Power Off Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restart Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shutdown Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5

1 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 7 7 7 7 7 9 10 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 14 15 16 17 17 18 19 20 20 21 22 22 23 24 24 25 25 25 26 27 29 31 31 32 32 33 33 1

Record of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Table of Contents -vii

- viii Table of Contents

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure 11. Hurco Machine with the Dual-Screen Console 12. Dual-Screen and Single-Screen Console . . . . 13. Full Precision Editing Pop-up Box . . . . . . . . . 14. Example of a drop-down list . . . . . . . . . . . . 15. Example of Expand and Collapse Files . . . . . 16. Example of Sorting and Resizing Columns . . 17. Pop-up message example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18. Pop-up showing minimize and close icons . . . 19. Status Bar and other areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110.Calculator pop-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111.Dual-Screen Console Panel Groups . . . . . . . 112.Single-Screen Console Panel Groups . . . . . . 113.Remote Jog Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114.Communications Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115.Male 9-Pin D-Type Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -2 1 -3 1 -5 1 -6 1 -6 1 -7 1 -7 1 -7 1 -8 1 -8 1 - 11 1 - 12 1 - 17 1 - 27 1 - 28

Figure 21. WinMax Program Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 Figure 22. Load Program screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2 Figure 23. Disk Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5 Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. Auxiliary Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine Parameters, Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine Parameters, HMX (left) and VTXU (right), Page 2 . . . . . Machine Parameters, Page 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine Parameters, Page 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Estimated Run Time Parameters for a horizontal milling machine Language Selection screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Information and Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -1 3 -11 3 - 20 3 - 24 3 - 27 3 - 31 3 - 34 3 - 36 4 -3 4 -4 4 -4 4 -6 4 -8 4 - 10 4 - 11 4 - 14 4 - 18 4 - 28 4 - 30 4 - 34 4 - 35 4 - 36 4 - 38 4 - 46 4 - 47 4 - 48 4 - 59 4 - 62 4 - 66

41. Part Zero Relative to Machine Zero Viewed Looking Down at 42. Axis Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43. Part Zero in Z (Tool Zero Calibration Plane) . . . . . . . . . . . 44. Part Setup Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45. 5-Axis Part Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46. Offset Z or Part Zero Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47. Safety Work Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48. Work Offsets on a dual-zone machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49. Tool Measurement screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410.Tool Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411.Advanced Tool Settings: Feed and Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412.Part Program Tool Review of a Conversational program . . . 413.Part Program Tool Review of an NC program . . . . . . . . . . . 414.Tool Review showing Unknown tool in NC program . . . . . . 415.Tool Matching Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416.Blend Offset and Blend Overlap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417.Cutter Compensation using the Insert Arc parameter . . . . . 418.Cutter Compensation using the Insert Line parameter . . . . 419.Program Review Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420.CE Status & Diagnostics Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421.Solid graphic display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
704-0116-115

Table ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... .....

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

List of Figures -ix

Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure

51. VMX 40-Taper ATC with 24-station Tool Magazine . . . 52. VMX 64/50-Taper, 32 Station ATC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53. Machine Diagnostics Screen for HMX Machine . . . . . . 54. HMX ATC Diagnostics Screen, Status Condition Fields 55. ATC & Machine Diagnostics Screen, Page 1 . . . . . . . . 56. Machine Function Screen with M Code List . . . . . . . . 57. APC Diagnostics Screens 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58. APC Diagnostic screen 1 with APC Jog Mode messages 59. APC Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510.Isometric view of parts in both zones . . . . . . . . . . . . 511.Emergency Stop and Zone Confirmation buttons . . . . 512.Auto Mode screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513.Auto Mode Monitoring screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 -8 5 -9 5 - 11 5 - 12 5 - 14 5 - 18 5 - 19 5 - 21 5 - 22 5 - 25 5 - 25 5 - 27 5 - 30

- x List of Figures

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

DOCUMENTATION CONVENTIONS
This documentation uses several conventions to explain the safety features and emphasize key concepts. These conventions are described in this section. Additional information is available on the machines Documentation CD.

WinMax Version

Current Machine Type (Desktop)

Softkeys

Prompts Error/Status area Status Bar

Console Buttons and Keys

References to console buttons and keys appear in bold text throughout the documentation. For example, the Start Cycle button appears as the Start Cycle button and the Manual key appears as the Manual console key in text. Refer to the Getting Started with WinMax manual for information about console buttons and keys, in addition to other information about using softkeys and the pop-up text entry window.

Icons
This manual may contain the following icons: Caution/Warning The operator may be injured and the machine severely damaged if the described procedure is not followed.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Documentation Conventions xi

Important Ensures proper operation of the machine and control.

Troubleshooting

Steps that can be taken to solve potential problems.

Hints and Tricks Useful suggestions that show creative uses of the WinMax features.

Where can we go from here? Lists several possible options the operator can take. Table of Contents To assist with onscreen PDF viewing, this icon is located on the cover page. Click the icon to access the Table of Contents (TOC). You can also access many of the same TOC entries from the Adobe Reader bookmarks located on the left side of the PDF page.

A - xii Documentation Conventions

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

PROGRAMMING AND OPERATION INFORMATION

Hurco provides documentation for using WinMax software on a control or desktop in two formats: on-screen Help and PDF. The information contained in both formats is identical. On-screen Help contains information about the current screen. If Help is not available for a screen, a Welcome screen appears with access to the Table of Contents, Index, or Search functions. To view the on-screen Help directly on a Hurco control, select the Help console key. To view the on-screen Help on the desktop software, select the Help icon in the menu bar.

PDF files are available on the hard drive. These files can be copied from the hard drive to a USB memory device and transferred to a PC for viewing and printing.

Using the On-screen Help

On-screen Help provides information about using WinMax. The Help is context-sensitive to the screen level. Press the console Help button to display the Help topic for the current screen. The following list describes Help functions: Buttons in the upper left-hand corner of the Help screen are used to move through Help topics and print screens. Use the Hide button to hide the navigation pane. Use the Back button to return to the previous Help screen. Use the Print button to print the current displayed Help topic, if a printer is attached and configured. See Printing the Programming Manuals, on page A - xiv for more information about printing.

Use the arrow buttons to move between pages within a Help topic and to move through topics. Use the Contents tab for a list of information sorted by subject: 1. Select the + to expand the topic and view sub-topics. 2. Select the topic to display it.

Use the Index tab to show the Help index: 1. Quickly scroll to an index topic by typing the topic in the box at the top of the index. 2. Select a topic and the Display button to view the topic.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming and Operation Information A-xiii

Use the Search tab to search the Help for a word or phrase: 1. Type the search word(s) into the text box at the top of the pane. 2. Select the List Topics button. A list of topics that contain the search word(s) is displayed. 3. Select a topic and the Display button to view that topic.

Use the Favorites tab to save Help topics for quick access: 1. Select the Add button at the bottom of the pane to add the current topic. 2. Select a topic from the Favorites list, and select the Display button to view it. Select a topic from the Favorites list, and select the Remove button to remove it from the list.

Printing the Programming Manuals

The WinMax On-screen Help is also provided in PDF format for easy printing. The information contained in the PDF files is identical to the on-screen Help. The PDF files may be copied to a floppy disk or USB memory device to be transferred to a PC for printing. Here are the steps to access the PDF files: 1. From the Input screen, select the PROGRAM MANAGER F8 softkey. 2. Select the DISK OPERATIONS F7 softkey. 3. In the left-hand pane, navigate through the folders: For WinMax Mill on a machine, the path is D:\Hurco\Winmax Mill\hlp. For WinMax Desktop on a PC, the path is C:\Program Files\Winmax Mill\hlp.

The PDF files will appear in the right-hand pane. The SHOW ALL FILE TYPES field in User Interface Settings must be set to YES (default is NO) in order to see the PDF files in the directory. Access the SHOW ALL FILE TYPES field in Auxiliary Mode, Utilities/ User Preferences/ User Interface Settings. 4. Highlight the PDF file(s) in the right-hand pane, and select the COPY F2 softkey. 5. Ensure that your media is loaded (either a floppy disk in the disk drive or a USB memory device in the USB port), and navigate to the proper location in the lefthand pane of the DISK OPERATIONS screen (either the floppy drive A: or the USB port E:). Highlight the desired location. 6. Place the cursor in the right-hand pane and select the PASTE F3 softkey to paste the PDF file(s) to the desired location. You may now remove your media and load the PDF file(s) onto a PC for printing.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming and Operation Information xiv

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

A-xv

A - xvi

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

MACHINE AND CONSOLE BASICS

These topics are discussed in this section: Machine Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 WinMax Interface Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Control Panel Function Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Emergency Stop Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Programming Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Axis, Spindle, and Machine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Machine Operations Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Communications Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Automatic Tool Changers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 3 4 11 13 13 16 25 27 30

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Machine and Console Basics 1-1

Machine Components
Before using the machine, you should become familiar with its components. Because of European Committee (CE) requirements, Hurco machines sold in Europe differ somewhat from those sold elsewhere. The figure below identifies some of the easily recognized components of a machine. The console is in front of the machine, facing the operators area.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Console Way Cover Table Spindle Power Drawbar Spindle Motor Z-Axis Servo Column Base

Figure 11. Hurco Machine with the Dual-Screen Console

Hurco machines are available with several hardware and software options. Information about these options is available from Hurco or your Hurco Distributor.

1 - 2 Machine and Console Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Consoles
The dual-screen and single-screen consoles use WinMax software:

Figure 12. Dual-Screen and Single-Screen Console

The console, and the electrical components required to operate it, are called the control or the CNC (Computer Numeric Control). Some of the electrical components are built into a separate enclosure kept in the machines electrical cabinet. Some of the controls internal components, such as disk drives and memory, are like those in a PC. Disk operations, such as copying, deleting and storing files, are also similar. The controller uses only the portions of the Windows operating system that are necessary to run Hurco CNCs. The operating system is XP Embedded, not the XP distributed on general purpose PCs. Therefore, customers are not permitted to install software on the WinMax controller. The floppy drive is located on the consoles right side panel. To protect the drive from debris, the protective floppy drive cover should be closed, except when inserting or removing a diskette. Information about options is available from Hurco or your Hurco distributor.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Machine and Console Basics 1-3

WinMax Interface Environment

There are three ways to navigate and enter data for programming: Touchscreenuse the stylus or other pointing device to select softkeys and drop-down lists for data entry and programming. Keyboarduse the function (F1-F12) keys and other keyboard shortcuts for navigation and to call up screens. Ultimax classic edit modeuse the console keys; for example, use the arrow keys for navigation and the enter key to accept data typed into a field. See Edit Mode below for more information.

Edit Mode
Edit Mode is set in Utilities. Refer to User Interface Settings, on page 3 - 3. WinMax has two edit modes: Ultimax Classic (default)in this mode the console arrow keys are used to move between blocks and segments, and the enter key is used to accept data after it is typed into a field. Windows Dialogin this mode the console arrow keys do not navigate through fields and the enter key is not required to accept data typed into a field. Ultimax Classic
Enter key to accept data

If you want to...

Enter data into a field

Windows Dialog
Enter key to accept data OR Down (or Up) arrow to accept data

Advance to next block

Right/Left arrows OR Next Block/Previous Block softkeys OR Page Up or Page Down key

Next Block/Previous Block softkeys OR Page Up or Page Down key

Advance to next segment or operation

Right/Left arrows OR Next segment/hole softkeys OR Page Up or Page Down key

Next segment/hole softkeys OR Page Up or Page Down key

Navigate to next or previous tool in Tool Setup

Left or right arrow keys

Page Up or Page Down keys

The right and left arrows will change the selection in fields with dropdown lists (such as Tool Type in Tool Setup) in either Ultimax Classic or Windows Dialog mode.

1 - 4 Machine and Console Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Full Precision Editing

Numbers with decimals are rounded to the decimal display limit (three digits for metric and four digits for imperial) when displayed in a field. Full Precision Editing allows you to view the full number (up to 12 digits after the decimal) and/or to edit it to a more precise point. With the cursor in a numeric decimal field, press F + decimal (.) on a machine, or Ctrl + decimal (.) on the desktop to open a pop-up box containing the number.

Figure 13. Full Precision Editing Pop-up Box

Edit the number and select OK to save the changes. To close the pop-up box without saving changes, select Cancel. Do not use Full Precision Editing to change numbers that are automatically calculated by WinMax. These numbers are calculated to their 12-digit maximum accuracy and changing them could result in changes to other automatic calculations in the program.

Softkeys
Softkeys appear as buttons on the screen; their default location is the right side of the screen, but they can also be positioned on the left by changing the setting in User Preferences (see Utilities, on page 3 - 1 for more information). Select a softkey using one of these methods: On the screen, select the softkey. On the console, simultaneously press the F key and the number that corresponds to the softkey (for example, F + 1 will select the F1 softkey). For dual-console machines, ALT + the softkey number will select softkeys on the graphics screen. On the keyboard (if using), press the corresponding function key (F1, F2, F3, etc).

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Machine and Console Basics 1-5

Drop-down Lists
Many fields contain a choice of items that are viewed by pulling down a list:

Touch the small arrow to view a drop-down list; use arrow keys to highlight choice and Enter console button to select Figure 14. Example of a drop-down list

Expand and Collapse Files

In the Program Manager, files can be expanded or collapsed as follows:
Touch the + to expand and view the files and folders in a folder

Touch the - to collapse (close) and hide the files and folders in a folder

Figure 15. Example of Expand and Collapse Files

1 - 6 Machine and Console Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Sorting and Resizing Columns

On screens that contain columns, data in a column can be sorted ascending to descending or descending to ascending by selecting the column heading. Columns can be resized by dragging the column divider in the header.

Select to sort column

Select and drag to resize column

Figure 16. Example of Sorting and Resizing Columns

Pop-ups
During machine operation and programming, pop-up boxes may be displayed to convey prompts or status messages. These pop-up boxes can be closed by selecting the appropriate button (i.e., YES or NO or OK). Some pop-up boxes may only provide informational messages and will be displayed for a few seconds before they automatically close.

Figure 17. Pop-up message example

Certain pop-ups, such as the calculator and virtual keyboard, can be minimized by selecting the in the upper right corner. These pop-ups will remain open but are hidden in the taskbar, and can be viewed again by touching the taskbar button. These pop-ups can also be closed by touching the X in the upper right corner:
Minimize Close

Figure 18. Pop-up showing minimize and close icons

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine and Console Basics 1-7

Status Bar
The Status Bar appears at the bottom of every WinMax screen. It displays the program name of the current active part program, a calculator icon, the current unit of measure (inch or mm), the keyboard icon, and the current time. When viewed on a single screen console, all icons appear in the same status bar; when viewed on a dual-screen console, the program name and calculator icon appear on the left screen status bar, and the unit of measure, keyboard icon and time appear on the right screen status bar. To use the calculator function, touch the calculator icon. To use the on-screen keyboard, touch the keyboard icon. To change the unit of measure, touch the unit of measure abbreviation.

WinMax Version

Softkeys

Prompts Error/Status area Status Bar

Figure 19. Status Bar and other areas

Calculator
Select the calculator icon in the Status Bar to open the calculator. The calculator appears on screen and is operated using the stylus to select the calculator keys on screen.

Figure 110. Calculator pop-up

When the calculator is minimized (with in the upper right), the last calculation is retained, but when it is closed (with X in the upper right), the last calculation is erased.
1 - 8 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

On-screen Help
On-screen Help provides information about using WinMax. The Help is context-sensitive to the screen level. Press the console Help button to display the Help topic for the current screen. The following list describes Help functions: Buttons in the upper left-hand corner of the Help screen are used to move through Help topics and print screens. Use the Hide button to hide the navigation pane. Use the Back button to return to the previous Help screen. Use the Print button to print the current displayed Help topic, if a printer is attached and configured. See Accessing the WinMax Help in PDF format, on page 1 - 10 for more information about printing.

Use the arrow buttons to move between pages within a Help topic and to move through topics. Use the Contents tab for a list of information sorted by subject: 1. Select the + to expand the topic and view sub-topics. 2. Select the topic to display it.

Use the Index tab to show the Help index: 1. Quickly scroll to an index topic by typing the topic in the box at the top of the index. 2. Select a topic and the Display button to view the topic.

Use the Search tab to search the Help for a word or phrase: 1. Type the search word(s) into the text box at the top of the pane. 2. Select the List Topics button. A list of topics that contain the search word(s) is displayed. 3. Select a topic and the Display button to view that topic.

Use the Favorites tab to save Help topics for quick access: 1. Select the Add button at the bottom of the pane to add the current topic. 2. Select a topic from the Favorites list, and select the Display button to view it. 3. Select a topic from the Favorites list, and select the Remove button to remove it from the list.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Machine and Console Basics 1-9

Accessing the WinMax Help in PDF format

The WinMax On-screen Help is also provided in PDF format for easy printing. The information contained in the PDF files is identical to the on-screen Help. The PDF files may be copied to a floppy disk or USB memory device to be transferred to a PC for viewing or printing. Here are the steps to access the PDF files: 1. From the Input screen, select the PROGRAM MANAGER F8 softkey. 2. Select the DISK OPERATIONS F7 softkey. 3. In the left-hand pane, navigate through the folders: For WinMax Mill on a machine, the path is D:\Hurco\Winmax Mill\hlp For WinMax Desktop on a PC, the path is C:\Program Files\Winmax Mill\hlp

The PDF files will appear in the right-hand pane. The SHOW ALL FILE TYPES field in User Interface Settings must be set to YES (default is NO) in order to see the PDF files in the directory. Access the SHOW ALL FILE TYPES field in Auxiliary Mode, Utilities/ User Preferences/ User Interface Settings. 4. Highlight the PDF file(s) in the right-hand pane, and select the COPY F2 softkey. 5. Ensure that your media is loaded (either a floppy disk in the disk drive or a USB memory device in the USB port), and navigate to the proper location in the left-hand pane of the DISK OPERATIONS screen (either the floppy drive A: or the USB port E:). Highlight the desired location. 6. Place the cursor in the right-hand pane and select the PASTE F3 softkey to paste the PDF file(s) to the desired location. 7. You may now remove your media and load the PDF file(s) onto a PC for viewing and printing.

1 - 10 Machine and Console Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Control Panel Function Groups

The buttons, keys, and knobs on the dual- and single-screen consoles are grouped by their functions. Here are the control panel groups on a dual-screen console:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Touchscreen softkeys Text screen Graphics screen Brightness control Machine operation keys Emergency stop Trackball Programming keyboard Remote jog Emergency stop Axis, spindle, and machine control Power on button

Figure 111. Dual-Screen Console Panel Groups

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Machine and Console Basics 1-11

The dual-screen console also has a power on button, emergency stop button, and brightness control thumbwheels for the Text screen and Graphics screen. Some consoles are also equipped with contrast control thumbwheels. Here are the control panel groups on a single-screen console:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Power On Button Emergency Stop Button Enable Button (operable with CE enabled) Axis, Spindle, and Machine Control Dials Machine Operation Keys Console Jog Unit USB Port Programming Keyboard

Figure 112. Single-Screen Console Panel Groups

1 - 12 Machine and Console Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Emergency Stop Buttons

There is an Emergency Stop button located on each console and one on the Remote Jog Unit. Press the Emergency Stop button to stop all spindle and table motion. This button locks down when pressed. To release it, twist the button in the direction indicated by the arrows. Learn the location of all Emergency Stop buttons on the machining center before operating. If the Emergency Stop button is pressed during execution of a part program, the tool must be jogged clear of the part before resuming operation. When the Emergency Stop button is pressed, a special error file is created and saved to the machine hard drive in a folder called NavESTOP. These files record the machine conditions at the time the Emergency Stop button is pressed. These files can be retrieved when necessary for service purposes; refer to Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files, on page 3 - 41 for more information.

Programming Keyboard
Program a job at the machine while reading from a blueprint or program worksheet. The prompts on the Text screen lead you through each element of a part program. Enter machine operations, part dimensions, and other parameters by selecting the appropriate screen softkeys and console buttons. Set up and run part programs, and manage part program files using the following data entry keys: Text Screen Data Entry Softkeys Numeric Keypad Pop-up Text Entry Window Graphics Screen Data Entry

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Machine and Console Basics 1-13

Text Screen Data Entry

Text screen data entry keys are used for entering programming information into the Text screens fields. These keys are located in the center of the consoles Programming Keypad.

Programming Mode
Programming Mode console keys are named for the screens they activate: Input displays the main programming screen used to create and edit part programs. From this screen, access Part Setup, Tool Setup, Part Programming, Program Parameters, Copy and Change Blocks, and Restore and Erase menus. Auxiliary accesses program storage management, system configuration settings, DXF files, reset master, and the upgrade system files menus. Review for Conversational programs, provides an outline view of the blocks currently programmed, including type of block and tool used. Jump to a desired block by typing the block number and pressing Enter. For Numerical Control (NC) programs, the Review key displays or re-displays the NC part program. Help displays help text. Place the cursor on a field in question and press the Help key. If help text is available, it will appear in a pop-up window. Help is not available for all screens.

These keys function as they would on a standard PC keyboard: Insert - type over and replace current text. Delete - delete the character to the right of the cursor. Home - position the cursor before a line of text. End - position the cursor at the end of a line of text. Page Up - position the cursor at the beginning of the previous page. Page Down - position the cursor at the beginning of the next page.

Text Screen Cursor Control Keys

These keys control cursor movement and perform programming operations: Arrow keys - move the cursor from one field to the next, or advance a part program to the next data block. Enter key () - accept the information typed in a text field, or move to the next field. Special Function keys C console key - Use the C console and Clear keys to delete the value at the current cursor position. Delete console key - Use the F console and Delete keys together to delete the character to the left of the cursor. Arrow console key - Use the F console key in combination with the arrow keys to quickly move the graphics cursor on the graphics screen.
704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

1 - 14 Machine and Console Basics

Numeric Keypad
The numeric keypad allows you to enter numbers and calculate values in the Text screen. Perform the following operations with this keypad: Enter numeric data into fields on the screen. Perform calculations using the mathematical symbols (, , , ) on the keypad.

Optional Computer Keyboard

If the console is equipped with an optional computer keyboard, use it to enter data into a field. Press the Enter key to update a field and advance the cursor.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Machine and Console Basics 1-15

Axis, Spindle, and Machine Control

The following keys and knobs are used to control machine movement and adjust the spindle and axes.

Override Knobs
Three knobs on the upper console allow you to override the programmed axis feedrate, rapid, and spindle speed. The Override knobs function as follows: Axis Feed Rate - controls the programmed axis feedrate during an auto run program. Turning the dial to counterclockwise slows the feedrate; turning the dial to clockwise speeds the feedrate. Selecting Min slows the spindle to 10% of the nominal value. Selecting Max increases the feedrate to 150% of the nominal value. Spindle Speed - controls the spindle speed. Turning the dial counterclockwise slows the spindle; turning the dial clockwise increases spindle speed. Selecting Min slows spindle speed to 640 RPM slower than the nominal value. Selecting Max increases spindle speed to 640 RPM faster than the nominal value. Rapid Override - overrides the programmed rapid traverse; the speed at which the table moves from one point to another. Selecting Min slows the table speed to 10% of the nominal value. Selecting Max increases the table speed to 150% of the nominal value.

1 - 16 Machine and Console Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Jog Unit
Use the Jog Unit to manually jog the axes. The Console Jog Unit is on the Max console. The hand-held Remote Jog Unit can be removed from the console and carried closer to the work piece.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Emergency Stop Button Store Position Key Hand Wheel Multiplier Keys Jog Hand Wheel Jog Feed Keys Jog Feed Override Axis Select Switch

Figure 113. Remote Jog Unit

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Machine and Console Basics 1-17

Both the Console Jog Unit and the Remote Jog Unit function the same: 1. Select an axis with the Axis Select Switch. 2. Use the Jog Feed Keys: a. Select either the + or Jog Feed Keys. b. Adjust Jog Feed Override to override the programmed axis feedrate. OR 3. Use the Hand Wheel Multiplier: a. Select a hand wheel resolution with one of the Hand Wheel Multiplier Keys. b. Rotate the Jog Hand Wheel. Other than the Emergency Stop button, the Jog Unit does not affect running programs. The dials on a Jog Unit are defined as follows: Axis Select Switch select the axis to jog (0, X, Y, Z, A, B). Jog Feed Override control the jog speed (10% to 150%) of the nominal value. Use this dial to touch off the tool and move the X and Y axes to touch off the part for Tool and Part Setup. Jog Feed Keys - select minus (-) or plus (+) jog direction. Jog Hand Wheel - select minus (-) or plus (+) jog direction. Hand Wheel Multiplier Keys - define the hand wheel resolution. x1 - defines a one-to-one ratio (each click equals .0001 inch, or .00254 mm). x10 - defines a 10-to-one ratio (each click equals .001 inch, or .0254 mm). x100 - defines a 100-to-one ratio (each click equals 0.01 inch, or .254 mm. One full turn equals 1 inch, or 25.4 mm).

Store Position Key - record the axis current position in the part programs setup screens. Enable buttonmust be held down to use the +/- jog buttons. See Enable Button, on page 1 - 23 for more information. See Setting Jog Unit Parameters, on page 1 - 19 for instructions on setting the Jog Unit parameters.

1 - 18 Machine and Console Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Use a Jog Unit to manually jog the axes: 1. Select an axis with the Axis Select Switch. 2. Use the Jog Feed Keys: a. Jog axis direction by select either + or . b. Use the Jog Feed Override to override the programmed axis feedrate. OR Use the Hand Wheel Multiplier: a. Select a hand wheel resolution with one of the Hand Wheel Multiplier Keys b. Rotate the Jog Hand Wheel to jog axis direction.

Setting Jog Unit Parameters

To access the parameters : 1. Press the Manual Mode console key to display the Manual screen. 2. Press the Manual Function (F2) softkey. The Jog Unit parameters are displayed: Manual Jog Feed - enter the desired manual jog axis feedrate. The range is from 0.0 to the machines maximum feedrate. An axis may have a maximum jog feedrate slower than other axes. This slower axis can only move at its maximum jog feedrate (and not the higher feedrate of other axes). For example, the X and Y axes on a machine each have a maximum jog feedrate of 787 inches per minute (ipm). The Z axis has a maximum jog feedrate of 100 ipm. Without using the jog feedrate override, the X and Y axes can jog at 787 ipm , but the Z axis is limited at 100 ipm. Manual Spindle Speed - enter the spindle speed when the Spindle On console key is pressed. This value can not be greater than the machines maximum spindle speed. Entering a negative value (e.g., -500) causes the spindle to reverse (turn counterclockwise) at that speed.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Machine and Console Basics 1-19

LCD Remote Jog Unit

The hand-held LCD Remote Jog Unit is designed to be removed from the console and carried closer to the work piece. Use it to manually jog the axes and access Manual mode, Part and Tool Setup, and Work Offsets.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

LCD Display Screen Motion Hold button Stop Cycle button Emergency Stop button Enable button Store Position key Mode Selector buttons Interrupt Cycle

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Start Cycle Cursor Control buttons (up, down, left, right) Cursor Control button (select) Jog Hand Wheel Jog Feed keys Hand Wheel Multiplier keys Jog Feed Override Axis Select switch

1 - 20 Machine and Console Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

The LCD Remote Jog Unit consists of: Motion Hold buttonstops all axes movement (except a tap operation) when the tool is in the programmed feedrate region. Pressing the button a second time allows machine positioning to resume. Stop Cycle buttonstops axes movement, then stops the spindle. Emergency Stop buttonstops all spindle and table motion. See Emergency Stop Buttons, on page 1 - 13 for more information. Enable buttonon machines with CE enabled, must be held to use the Start Cycle button and the +/- jog on the unit. See Enable Button, on page 1 - 23 for more information. Store Position keyrecords the axis current position in the part programs setup screens. LCD screen displays Manual mode (MAN), Part Setup (PSU), Tool Setup (TSU), Work Offsets (WO), and Aux Work Offsets (AWO). Mode Selector buttons positioned under the LCD screen are used to select the corresponding mode. The cursor control buttons are used to scroll up, down, left, and right, and to select items on the LCD display. These are the modes that can be selected: MANselects manual mode. The display shows machine or part positions for X, Y, and Z. Positions are zone relative on dual-zone machines. Pressing the cursor control down button will scroll the display to show additional axes (if present). The display scrolls up or down one line at a time using the cursor control buttons. PSUselects Part Setup. The display shows current part setup information. Values for X, Y, Z, A, B, C, as well as rotary centerline X, rotary centerline Y, and Z table offset are shown. Positions are zone relative on dual-zone machines. The display scrolls up or down one line at a time using the cursor control buttons. TSUselects Tool Setup. The display shows current tool setup information. The up and down cursor control buttons scroll though the tool setup information. The left and right cursor control buttons scroll between tools. The initial tool displayed is the current tool in spindle. WOselects Work Offsets. The displays shows G54, G55, G56, G57, G58, G59 and Shift values. The cursor control buttons scroll up or down through the offsets. AWOselects Aux Work Offsets. The display shows offsets 1-93. The cursor control buttons scroll up or down through the offsets.

Jog Hand Wheel - select minus (-) or plus (+) jog direction. Jog Feed Keys - select minus (-) or plus (+) jog direction. Hand Wheel Multiplier Keys - defines the hand wheel resolution. x1 - defines a one-to-one ratio (each click equals .0001 inch, or .00254 mm). x10 - defines a 10-to-one ratio (each click equals .001 inch, or .0254
704-0116-115 Machine and Console Basics 1-21

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

mm). x100 - defines a 100-to-one ratio (each click equal s 0.01 inch, or .254 mm. One full turn equals 1 inch, or 25.4 mm).

Jog Feed Override controls the jog speed (10% to 150%) of the nominal value. Use this dial to touch off the tool and move the X and Y axes to touch off the part for Tool and Part Setup. Axis Select Switch selects the axis to jog (0, X, Y, Z, A, B). See Setting Jog Unit Parameters, on page 1 - 19 for instructions on setting the Jog Unit parameters.

Basic function of the LCD Remote Jog Unit is as follows: 1. Select an axis with the Axis Select Switch. 2. Use the Jog Feed Keys: a. Select either the + or Jog Feed Keys. b. Adjust Jog Feed Override to override the programmed axis feedrate. OR 3. Use the Hand Wheel Multiplier: a. Select a hand wheel resolution with one of the Hand Wheel Multiplier Keys. b. Rotate the Jog Hand Wheel.

1 - 22 Machine and Console Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Enable Button
The LCD Remote Jog, standard Remote Jog, single-screen and dual-screen consoles may be equipped with an Enable button. The Enable button is functional only on machines that have CE enabled. The Enable button has three positions: fully up (off), middle (on), and fully down (off). The button must be in the middle position to be enabled. The Enable button is required for the following operations: Start Cycle (on LCD Remote Jog only)press and hold the Enable button and press the Start Cycle button on the unit. The Enable button can be released after the cycle is started. Both the Enable button and the Start Cycle button must be held down to run the spindle with the enclosure doors open. It is not necessary to use the Enable button when using the Start Cycle button on the console. +/- Jogpress and hold the Enable button while simultaneously selecting either + or - button to jog the selected axis, only when the enclosure doors are open. If the enclosure doors are closed, it is not necessary to use the Enable button to jog the axes. It is not necessary to press and hold the Enable button to jog the axis using the hand wheel at x1, x10, or x100 speeds.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Machine and Console Basics 1-23

Machine Control
Machine Control buttons start and stop machine operation. The buttons function as follows: Power On - enables the relay control system. This button must be illuminated to operate the machine, but may be switched off while creating or editing a part program. Start Cycle - activates machine operation. When the machine is in an active mode, the Start Cycle flashes to indicate the machine is ready. When this button is pressed again, the light switches off. To turn Control Power On: 1. Press the Power On console button. 2. Press the Manual Mode console key. 3. Press the Start Cycle console button. Never press the Start Cycle button without knowing exactly what the machine will do. Stop Cycle - stops axes movement, then stops the spindle. Feed Hold (Motion Hold on Max console) - stops all axes movement, except a tap operation, when the tool is in the programmed feedrate region. Pressing the button a second time allows machine positioning to resume.

To Stop an Automatic Machine Operation: Press the Stop Cycle button to stop the axis, then the spindle. Or 1. Press the Feed Hold (or Motion Hold) console button to stop axis motion. 2. Press the Spindle Off console key to stop the spindle. 3. Press the Feed Hold (or Motion Hold) console button again.

1 - 24 Machine and Console Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Machine Operations Keys

The Machine Operations console keys are needed to run part programs and control the machine during cutting. These keys are labeled under the Machine Mode, Spindle, Tool Changer, and Coolant groupings.

Machine Mode
The Machine Mode console keys have these functions: Auto - allows you to run a part program automatically. See Auto Mode, on page 5 - 27 for more information. Interrupt - halts machine operation during automatic execution of a program to allow manual functions, such as cleaning the work piece. See Stop Motion, on page 1 - 25 for more information. Press Auto or Single to resume the part program and most cycles that were manually started by the operator (such as Chip Auger or Conveyor). Single - provides access to the Single Cycle screen. In this mode, the machine stops the axes after each automatic operation. In Conversational Programming the machine halts (with the spindle running) after each hole operation, contour segment, or milling subroutine. For NC Programming, the machine halts with the spindle running after each data block is executed. Pressing the flashing Start Cycle button causes the automatic machining operation to resume. For information on the Single Cycle screen softkeys, see the Auto Mode, on page 5 - 27 section. The softkeys are the same on both screens. Test - provides access to perform a program test run to identify potential problems before cutting the part. For more information, see Auto Mode, on page 5 - 27. Manual - provides access to manual machine operations that allow axis positioning with the jog unit. See Manual Safety Override Mode, on page 4 61 for more information.

Stop Motion
If you observe a problem during the cutting process or simply want to stop the machine to make some adjustments, you may press one of three buttons to stop motion: Feed Holdstops all axes movement (except a tapping operation in progress), when the tool is in the programmed feedrate region. Pressing the button a second time allows machine positioning to resume without loss of position, provided no other button or key has been pressed. Interrupt Cyclehalts machine operation during automatic execution of a program to allow manual functions such as cleaning the work piece. Pressing the Interrupt button performs the following actions: 1. Stops all motion except the spindle. 2. Pulls the tool straight up and out of the part. 3. Stops the spindle. 4. Displays the manual screen on the console.
Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine and Console Basics 1-25

To restart the part program, press the Auto button followed by the Start Cycle button. If any key other than the Auto button is pressed to restart the program, the system cancels the execution of the part program. Emergency Stopall motion stops and power is shut off to the spindle, relay control, and servo systems. An emergency stop message with recovery instructions appears at the bottom of the text screen. To release an Emergency Stop button, twist the button in the direction indicated by the arrows and pull the button up. After the last choice is selected, the following sequence occurs: 1. A prompt is displayed to press the Start button while the console Start Cycle button flashes. 2. When the Start Cycle button is pressed, the program begins running at the specified point of the Start Block. 3. When the specified End Block is reached, the display indicates that Recovery Restart mode is complete and the Start Cycle button flashes again. 4. If the Start Cycle button is pressed again, then the program will rerun using the same Start and End Blocks.

Spindle
Onactivates the spindle if the machine is in manual mode. The Start Cycle button must also be pushed to start spindle rotation. Offstops spindle rotation during manual operation if the Spindle On button was previously pressed.

Tool Changer
Autoactivates the automatic tool changing function. When selected, all operator-initiated tool changes will be automatic. Manualactivates the manual tool changing function. When selected, all tools must be manually inserted into or removed from the spindle; bypassing the automatic tool changer.

Coolant
Autoactivates the selected coolant to spray whenever the tool is below the Retract Clearance plane. The coolant turns off when the tool moves above the Retract Clearance plane, or during a tool change. This key cannot be activated in Manual mode. Pressing this key a second time turns off the coolant operation. Primaryfunctions only on machines equipped with a primary (i.e., flood) coolant system. Activates the primary coolant system when the machine is in Auto or Manual mode, and overrides an Coolant Auto operation. Pressing the Primary key a second time turns off this operation.

1 - 26 Machine and Console Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Secondaryfunctions only on machines equipped with a secondary coolant system (e.g., Coolant Through Spindle, CTS). Activates the secondary coolant system when the machine is in Auto or Manual mode and overrides Coolant Auto operation. Pressing the Secondary key a second time turns off this operation.

Communications Panel
All communication ports are located on the Comm Port panel assembly on machine control cabinet. The following connectors are available: Port
10-base T Indexer PORT 1 and Port 2 USB

Connector Type
RJ45 8-pin military 9-pin USB jump drive

Use
Network (Ethernet) Indexer RS-232C Serial Communications Not available for use.

The communication ports are typically arranged as follows:

Figure 114. Communications Panel

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Machine and Console Basics 1-27

RS-232C Serial Port

The RS-232C serial ports can be used to connect peripherals to the machine. These ports may be addressed separately. The standard baud rates are software-selectable. The ports can be used as an output or input, depending upon the software. The connector pin designated for the RS-232C signal is shown below:

Figure 115. Male 9-Pin D-Type Connector

While the signals present at the serial port conforms to the RS-232C standard, not all standard RS-232C signals are available. Some peripheral devices may provide RS-232C control signals that are not available at the port described here. However, such devices can usually be adapted to the port. In some cases, it may be necessary to add jumpers to the connector. Signals available at the serial port are:
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 Signal Name Signal on the Pin

Data Carrier Detect (DCD) Receive Data (RXD) Transmit Data (TXD) Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Signal Ground (SG) Data Set Ready (DSR) Request to Send (RTS)

Not used by the control. Data received (by machine) in serial format from peripheral device. Data transmitted (by machine) to peripheral device in serial format. Not used by the control. Line establishing the common ground reference potential for all interface lines. Signal to notify printer that transmitter is ready for transmission. Line used by control to instruct peripheral device to get ready to receive data. Data can be transmitted after the Clear-To-Send signal is received from connected peripheral device. Control line used by peripheral device to indicate that it is ready to receive data from machine. Signal indicates modem has received the ring of an incoming call.

8 9

Clear to Send (CTS) Ring Indicator (RI)

To connect a peripheral to the machine, fabricate an adapter cable. If a properly shielded low capacitance cable is used, cable lengths of up to 100 feet are permissible. Be certain that you use the correct cabling before connecting the device to the machine. Consult the peripheral manual to determine whether the peripheral is a Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) or Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device. The Hurco machine is a DTE device, and in most cases, so is a personal computer. A printer may be either a DTE or DCE device.

1 - 28 Machine and Console Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Indexer Port
Indexing signals are always present at the Indexer port, so there is no need to turn it on. It is the customers responsibility to provide a harness from the Indexer to the Indexer port. Before making this harness, see the Parts Listing and Diagrams Manual for the correct pin-outs.

Network Port
The 10baseT (RJ45) connector is used with the Ultinet option. This option requires an ethernet card, cabling from the ethernet card to the communications panel, and an optikey diskette to enable the option.

USB Port
The USB Port (Universal Serial Bus) is a high-speed port that allows you to connect devices, such as printers and jump drives to the panel. You can use a jump drive to transfer files.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Machine and Console Basics 1-29

Automatic Tool Changers

Hurco machining centers use either a Swing-Arm Random Pocket Automatic Tool Changer (ATC) or a Horizontal Chain Type ATC. Both types of ATCs function essentially the same. Each tool is inserted into a tool holder before being loaded into the spindle. The orientation hole in the tool holder must always line up with the orientation key in the tool changer. Tool changer stations are numbered to identify and locate each tool. Only use tools that are dimensioned for the maximum spindle speed.

Loading a Tool into the Spindle

Use this procedure to manually load a tool into the spindle: 1. Press the Machine Mode Manual console key to prevent the ATC from moving while you insert a tool. The Manual screen appears. 2. Touch the Orient Spindle softkey to position the spindle for tool insertion. If there is a tool in the spindle, refer to Removing Tools from the ATC Magazine, on page 1 - 32. On some machines the Y-axis moves to the front of the machine for manual tool changes. 3. Insert the tool holder into the spindle. Make sure the tool holder slots align with the spindle head guides. 4. Release the Spindle Unclamp button to secure the tool in the spindle. Be certain that the tool is firmly seated. 5. Touch the Tool In Spindle softkey. The Tool In Spindle field appears. 6. Make sure the tool number in the Tool In Spindle field matches the number of the tool in the spindle. If the numbers do not match, enter the correct tool number. 7. To load a tool into the ATC magazine, see the Loading Tools into the ATC Magazine, on page 1 - 31 section.

Unloading a Tool from the Spindle

To manually remove a tool from the spindle, follow these steps: 1. Press the Manual Mode console key. The Manual screen appears. 2. Hold the tool to prevent it from dropping. 3. Press the Spindle Unclamp button. The spindle unclamp button is either on the side of the spindle, or the front of the spindle. Refer to Parts Listing and Wiring Diagrams Manual for your machine for a drawing showing the Spindle Unclamp button location. 4. The tool disengages. Pull the tool out of the spindle. 5. Release the Spindle Unclamp button when the tool is free.
704-0116-115

1 - 30 Machine and Console Basics

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Loading Tools into the ATC Magazine

The ATC takes a tool from the spindle and automatically loads it into the magazine, if space allows. The tools location in the magazine is recorded in the ATC Map (the Horizontal Chain Type ATC does not use an ATC Map). Before loading a tool into the ATC magazine, the Servo power must be On, and the machine must be calibrated. Do not manually load tools directly into the magazine. To load the tool currently in the spindle into the ATC magazine: 1. Press the Manual Mode console key. 2. Select the Tool Management softkey. The Spindle tab displays the Tool in Spindle, Next Tool, and ATC Map (Swing-Arm Random Pocket ATC only) fields appear. 3. Verify that the Tool In Spindle value matches the tool currently in the spindle. If the numbers do not match, enter the correct tool number. 4. Enter the same tool number into the Next Tool field. 5. Press the Tool Changer Auto console key. 6. Enter a new tool number into the Next Tool field. The ATC Map field must be Auto. 7. Press the Tool Changer Auto console key. The Start Cycle light begins flashing. 8. Clear the tool changer and shut the enclosure door. Press the Start Cycle button. The Tool In Spindle field will be updated to the next tool value. If the Next Tool is an Auto tool, it was placed into the magazine when the previous tool was removed from the spindle. If the Next Tool is a Manual tool, you will be prompted to insert it into the spindle.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Machine and Console Basics 1-31

Removing Tools from the ATC Magazine

Remove tools from the ATC magazine by following these steps: 1. Press the Manual Mode console key. 2. Select the Tool Management softkey to display the Tool in Spindle. If there is no tool in the spindle, set the Tool In Spindle field to 0 (zero). The ATC Map field will indicate if the tool selected is in the magazine, and its location. 3. Enter the tool number (of the tool you want to remove in the magazine) into the Next Tool field. 4. Press the Tool Changer Auto console key to move the Next Tool into the spindle. 5. Clear the tool changer area and shut the enclosure door. Press the Start Cycle button to initiate the tool change. 6. Press the Spindle Unclamp button and manually remove the tool from the spindle. 7. Repeat steps 2 through 6, as needed, to remove additional tools from the ATC magazine.

Large Tools in the ATC Magazine

A part program may require tools with large diameters. These tools can be manually loaded by the operator, or automatically loaded. The ATC magazine capacity is reduced by half for tools larger than 80 mm (125 mm for some machines). Follow these steps to load large tools into the ATC magazine: 1. Touch the ATC Map softkey from the Spindle screen. The ATC Map appears. 2. Touch the Max. Tool Dia. More than XX mm softkey. 3. An ATC Map will be cleared! Are you sure you want to change Max. Tool Diameter to more than XX mm? message appears. Each time you switch between large and small tools, the entire ATC Map will be cleared and the magazine must be reloaded. 4. Select the Yes softkey. The ATC Map will clear, then reappear. Only the odd numbered tool pockets will be available. 5. Reload tools into the magazine using the Loading a Tool into the Spindle section. 6. Return to the default setting of Maximum Tool Diameter XX mm or Less by using the previous procedure and touching the Max. Tool Dia. XX mm or Less softkey.

1 - 32 Machine and Console Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

PROGRAM MANAGER
These topics are discussed in this section: Managing Program Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Program Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Disk Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 FTP Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1 4 5 6

Managing Program Files

Program Manager shows all part programs that are in the controls memory to edit or run. Use the Program Manager menu to create, open, save, and close programs. Features of the Program Manager include: Ability to load more than one program at a time. Ability to load Conversational and NC programs at the same time. Ability to copy blocks from one program into another (blocks are copied in Program Review; Program Manager is used to switch between programs to facilitate copy and paste).

Program in use lock

Unsaved programs Program storage location

List of programs

Snapshot of part

File type and description

Figure 21. WinMax Program Manager

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Program Manager 2-1

Sort the program list by Program Name or Path by selecting the corresponding header. Select the Program Name header once to sort the list alphabetically. Select the Program Name header again and sort the list in reverse alphabetical order. Program Manager softkeys are: NEW F1creates a new part program. Choose the program type by selecting one of these softkeys: CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAM F1creates a new conversational part program. NC PROGRAM F2creates a new NC part program (extensions for NC part programs are determined by the NC dialect set in User Preferences. The .NC extension is also supported.). WinMax gives new programs the default name NONAME (for example, NONAME1.HWM). When new programs are created, they should be renamed with a suitable name and be saved to the hard drive or other media. OPEN F2opens a part program that is saved to the hard drive, network drive, floppy disk, or USB memory device. The Load Program screen opens, where you can locate the program from the list, as in the following example:

3. Select to open 1. Select folder

2. Select program file

Figure 22. Load Program screen

To find a program, navigate through the folders in the left pane by selecting + or - to expand or collapse. Select a folder to view its contents in the right pane. Load F1opens an HWM file or an XML1 file. Import F2opens an HD3 file.

2 - 2 Program Manager

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

HD3 and XML1 files will be listed with .HWM extension in Program Manager. HWM is Hurcos conversational program file type. SAVE AS must be used to resave the program as HD3. Using SAVE will save the program with the HWM extension. Programs cannot be saved with the XML1 extension. Sort the program list by File, Size, or Date by selecting the corresponding header. Programs with the same date will be sorted alphabetically. Select the File header once to sort the list alphabetically. Select the File header again to sort the list in reverse alphabetical order. SAVE F3saves the current part program to a hard drive, network drive, floppy disk, or USB memory device. If the program has a path indicated in Program Manager, it will be saved to the same location. Hurco recommends the following storage areas in My Computer: 3 Floppy (A:) PART_PROGS (D:) USB Device (E:) My Network Places (if the UltiNet option is installed)

Programs cannot be saved to the root level of the My Computer or My Documents directories. You must open these to see the directory listing before you can save to these areas. SAVE AS F4allows the current part program to be saved with a different name, as a different file type, or in a different location. Also used to save files with the default NONAME program name. Type the program name in the File Name box and select the file type, as in the following example:

To rename a program, highlight the entire name in the FILE NAME field and type or use alpha/numeric console keys to replace the name. To modify character(s) in the name, highlight the name, select again in the field, and use the cursor keys, delete, and the alpha/numeric keys to change the name. When the filename is completely highlighted, the filename extension does not have to be re-entered; the extension selected in the SAVE AS TYPE field will be added to the name entered in the FILE NAME field. For Conversational programs, the following file types are available from the Save As Type drop-down list: .HWMWinMax Mill conversational format .HD5WinMax Desktop conversational format (desktop only) .HD3Ultimax conversational format
704-0116-115 Program Manager 2-3

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

To save as an HWM file, select the SAVE F1 softkey. To save as an HD3 (or HD5) file, select the EXPORT F2 softkey. For NC programs, SAVE AS will default extensions to the selected NC dialect, either FNC or HNC. If another extension is desired, include the extension with the filename in the FILE NAME field. For example, SAMPLE. NC. CLOSE F5opens a menu to close selected program or all programs. Program Properties F6stores properties for the selected part program. Disk Operations F7opens the Disk Operations screen to browse available folders and files, and cut, copy, paste, rename, and delete files. FTP Manager F8displays external network connections (with the Ultinet option).

Program Properties
Program properties stores and manages properties for the selected part program. Fields are: DISPLAY UNITSthe unit of measurement (inches or millimeters) used throughout part programming (this field does not apply to NC programs). These units will be used when the part program is loaded into memory but the display value can be changed using the unit (IN or MM) icon in the status bar. NAMEthe file name of the part program. This field appears as read-only. PATHthe media and directory path to the saved program. This field appears as read-only. MATERIALthe material to be used, if specified (optional). This field appears as read-only; however, the material can be changed with the CHANGE MATERIAL F3 softkey. See Tool and Material Database, on page 4 41 for more information. DESCRIPTIONa short text description of the part program. PROGRAM TYPEspecifies the type of program. Use the drop-down list to change the program type in this field. Program type may be changed for an exisiting program, and any incompatible data blocks or part setup data is removed from the program. The default Conversational Program Type can be set in Coversational Settings, see Conversational Settings, on page 3 - 6 for more information. WRITE PROTECTIONprevents changes to the program from being saved when set to ON. Changes can be made if set to OFF. A write-protected program can be saved with a different program name. The user will be prompted to do this when attempting to save.

2 - 4 Program Manager

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Disk Operations
Disk Operations displays available directories and files. Cut, copy, paste, rename, and delete program files from Disk Operations. See also: Managing Program Files, on page 2 - 1 Import / Export Functions, on page 4 - 53 NC States, on page 4 - 53 Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files, on page 3 - 41

Directory Window

Files Window

Figure 23. Disk Operations

When a directory is highlighted in the Directory window, the softkeys are: CUT DIRECTORY F1deletes the directory from one location to be pasted into another location COPY DIRECTORY F2makes a copy of the directory (but does not delete) to be pasted into another location PASTE INTO DIRECTORY F3pastes the directory or file that has been cut or copied. For example, to copy a directory and paste it into a new location: 1. Highlight the directory you wish to copy. 2. Select the COPY DIRECTORY F2 softkey. 3. Highlight the folder in which you wish to place the copied directory.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Program Manager 2-5

4. Select the PASTE INTO DIRECTORY F3 softkey. CREATE DIRECTORY F4creates a new directory RENAME DIRECTORY F5renames a directory DELETE DIRECTORY F6removes the directory FTP MANAGER F7displays the external network connections (with Ultinet option)

When a file is highlighted in the Files Window, the softkeys are: CUT F1deletes the file from one location to be pasted into another location COPY F2makes a copy of the file (but does not delete) to be pasted into another location PASTE F3pastes the file that has been cut or copied. For example, to copy a file and paste it into a new location: 1. Highlight the file you wish to copy. 2. Select the COPY F2 softkey. 3. Highlight the folder in which you wish to place the copied file. 4. Select the PASTE F3 softkey. RENAME F4renames the file DELETE F5removes the file LOAD F6loads the file into the Program Manager FTP MANAGER F7displays the external network connections (with Ultinet option)

FTP Manager
FTP Manager allows you to transfer programs from a remote location (host), such as a PC or machine, to a local PC or another machine, using the UltiNet option. See WinMax Mill Options for more information.

2 - 6 Program Manager

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

UTILITIES
Utilities are accessed with the Auxiliary console key. Select the Auxiliary console key and this window with softkey selections appears on the screen:

Figure 31. Auxiliary Screen

Use the softkeys on the Auxiliary screen to navigate to other parts of WinMax Mill. Also toggle the Edit Lockout feature on and off with the Toggle Edit Lockout State softkey. See Edit Lockout, on page 3 - 4 for more information. Select the Utility Screen softkey to access the Utility screen. These functions are available and are described in this section: System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 User Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Machine Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Additional Utilities Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Printing Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Integrator Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Serial I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2 3 11 35 35 38 39 39

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Utilities 3-1

System Configuration
The SYSTEM CONFIGURATION softkey on the Utilities screen displays machine, control, and software information. Softkeys on the System Configuration submenu are: WinMax Configurationchanges WinMax configuration settings. Machine Specificationschanges machine specifications. Backup Config & Machine Filescopy Configuration and Machine files to a directory or to a USB memory device or floppy disk. Restore Config & Machine Filesuse saved files to overwrite existing Configuration and Machine files.

WinMax Configuration
The WinMax Configuration softkeys are: Software Versiondisplays the current version of WinMax Mill. Software Optionsdisplays the current software options available for the machining center. Motion Configurationdisplays the current motion system. Motion system can be changed in this screen if the Ultinet Option is enabled; select Standard or UltiMotion in the Motion System field. Ladder File ConfigurationLadder files bridge communication between the machine and the software. The current version of the Ladder files on the machining center, the total number of Ladder files, and any mismatched Ladder files that may cause a software conflict are displayed. Language File Configurationdisplays the language files. WinMax IP Addressdisplays the current IP address of the CNC.

Machine Specifications
Displays specific information about the machining center that was entered during software/machine installation. Machine ClassThe physical orientation of the spindle, relative to the table surface. The possible machine classes are vertical, horizontal, and universal. Vertical/HorizontalThe current orientation of the machine. This field will be vertical for vertical machines and horizontal for horizontal machines. For universal machines, this field can be either vertical or horizontal. Number of Axes PresentThe number of axes present on the machining center. Machine Hour MeterTotal number of machine hours expended to date. Maximum Spindle Motor SpeedThe maximum acceptable speed for the spindle. Maximum Spindle Tool SpeedThe maximum acceptable speed for a tool in the spindle.
704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

3 - 2 Utilities

Maximum Rapid Traverse RateThe maximum rapid traverse rate. Maximum Contouring RateThe maximum feedrate for contouring. Minus/Plus X/Y/Z Direction Travel LimitThe maximum and minimum travel limits for the X, Y and Z axes. Minus/Plus A/B/C Direction Travel LimitThe maximum and minimum travel limits for the A, B, and c axes.

Backup Config & Machine Files

Backup files can be used to restore corrupted Configuration and Machine files on the hard drive. Select this softkey and choose the location to copy the files. Backup files can be copied to any directory on the hard drive or to a USB memory device or floppy diskette.

Restore Config & Machine Files

Select this softkey to use saved Configuration and Machine files to overwrite existing files stored on the hard drive.

User Preferences
The USER PREFERENCES softkey on the Utilities screen provides access to the following: User Interface Settings, on page 3 - 3 Conversational Settings, on page 3 - 6 NC Settings, on page 3 - 7 Autosave Settings, on page 3 - 8 Tool Utilities and Settings, on page 3 - 8 Machine Parameters, on page 3 - 11 Serial Port Settings, on page 3 - 32 FTP Server Settings, on page 3 - 33 Rotary Axes Parameters, on page 3 - 33 WinMax Uptime, on page 3 - 33 Select Language, on page 3 - 34 Data Logging Filters, on page 3 - 34

User Interface Settings

User Interface Settings change the screen display. Fields are: Screen Configuration (desktop only)select Dual Screen or Single Screen display. Default is Single. Application Font Sizesize of text displayed by the application in lists (for

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Utilities 3-3

example, in Program Manager); default is Large. This field is inactive in WinMax Mill (active in WinMax desktop). Softkey Menu Positionpositions the softkey menu to the right or left of the screen; default is Right. Edit Modeselect either Ultimax Classic (default) or Windows Dialog. For example, Ultimax Classic requires the Enter key to change the value of a data field, while Windows Dialog will accept a number by pressing the Down arrow. Enable Program Restoreresets previously loaded programs when the application is started after a shutdown; default is No. Show All File Typesview all file extensions when opening files; default is No (only displays HWM, HD3, HD5, FNC, HNC, and NC file types). Screensaver Timeoutset screensaver timeout in minutes (range is 1-30 minutes); default is 10. List Control Rowsselect the appearance of list controls; default is Lines. List Icon Sizespecify Small or Large for the size of icons in lists. Warn Before Saving In Old Formatspecify if WinMax should warn that information may be lost when saving a program as HD3. Max Memory Loadcontrols the amount of system memory that graphics generation uses. The range is 50% to 100%; default is 85%. Graphics generation that uses more than the specified memory will be aborted by the system and an error message will be displayed. Raising the maximum memory load allows large programs to be drawn. If Max Memory Load is set to 100%, graphics generation will not abort even if all system memory is being used to draw a graphic. Edit Lockout Levelsets the level of protection, Partial or Full, to limit access to part programming softkeys and other functions when Edit Lockout feature is enabled.

Edit Lockout The Edit Lockout feature limits access to certain program functions and screens. Partial and Full lockout levels are available. Partial lockout prevents changes to the part program, while Full lockout prevents changes to the program as well as to setup information. Refer to the table below for a complete listing of features that are affected by partial and full lockout. Edit Lockout is enabled or disabled with the Toggle Edit Lockout State softkey located on the Auxiliary screen. When the softkey is selected, a pop-up box appears prompting for the password. Enter the password and select OK. The Edit Lockout feature is enabled (or disabled if it was previously enabled), and a confirmation message appears. Set Edit Lockout Level to Partial or Full on the User Interface Settings screen: 1. Select the Auxiliary console key. The Auxiliary screen opens. 2. Select the Utility Screen softkey. 3. Select the User Preferences softkey. 4. Select the User Interface Settings softkey. Select Partial or Full in the
704-0116-115

3 - 4 Utilities

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Edit Lockout Level field. When Partial is selected, you can also lock out Part Setup and/or Tool Setup. When the cursor is in the Edit Lockout Level field, the Change Lockout Password softkey is available. The first time the feature is used, the password should be reset from the factory default. This password is required to enable and disable Edit Lockout. You will be redirected to the Input screen if you are on a screen that becomes locked out when you enter the password. Here are the features locked with Edit Lockout: Feature
Part Programming Program Parameters Program Review: Multiple Block Functions (Copy, Paste, Insert, Delete) Copy/Change Blocks Erase Functions Capture Feeds and Speeds (Auto) DXF DB Search / Block Jump Jump to Block (from Error Message) Import Functions Part Setup Work Offsets Tool Setup Tool Setup: Feeds and Speeds

Partial
Locked Locked Locked Locked Erase Part Program and Parameters locked Locked Locked Locked Locked Import Part Program and Parameters locked Depends on setting Accessible with Part Setup access Depends on setting When Tool Setup is accessible, feeds and speeds are updated, but data blocks that use the tools are not. Accessible with Tool Setup access Accessible with Tool Setup access Accessible Accessible Accessible

Full
Locked Locked Locked Locked Locked Locked Locked Locked Locked Locked Locked Locked Locked Locked

Tool Offsets Part Program Tool Review: Match Tools, Add Unmatched Tool User Preferences Probing Cycles Part Counter

Locked Locked Locked Locked Locked

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Utilities 3-5

Fields or softkeys appear grayed out and are not accessible when lockout mode is enabled. In cases where an entire screen is locked out, you will be redirected to the Input screen. Additional Edit Lockout considerations: Runtime modificationsEdit Lockout does not prevent a running program from modifying setup or itself. For instance, if the program uses part or tool probing blocks or macros that manipulate program variables or part or tool setup directly, this is allowed. Recovery RestartRecovery Restart is enabled in both conversational and NC modes when Edit Lockout is enabled. Access to the NC Editor is allowed in this case in order to set the restart marker, but text entry and all softkeys that allow modification of the program (for example, Cut and Paste) are disabled. OverridesSpeed/Feed overrides are controlled by the Override Lockout parameter in Program Parameters General 1 tab. Since Program Parameters are not accessible in Partial or Full lockout mode, Override Lockout should be set to ON so overrides cannot be adjusted while running the program.

Conversational Settings
Conversational Settings fields are: Math Assist Styleselect either Ultimax Classic or Standard Calculator interface to be used when editing data fields. Ultimax Classicselect operation (=,-,*,/), then number, and then Enter. For example, if the number 5 is displayed as a value, pressing + and the number 3 will change the value to 8. Standard Calculatorselect number, then operation (=,-,*,/), then Enter. For example, if the number 5 is displayed as a value, pressing 3 and + will change the value to 8. Check Calc Assist Inconsistenciesthis setting is useful when there are slight discrepancies or conflicts in contour data; for example, as happens occasionally with contours imported using DXF, due to bad segment connections in the DXF file. When set to Yes, an error message is generated when these inconsistencies are present in a contour segment. When set to No, the contour is allowed to draw and run, as long as there is enough relevant data to generate valid geometry. Default Conversational Program Typeselect the default program type when creating new Conversational programs. Display Machine Axes For Universal Typeselect Yes to display, in Part Setup, only the rotary axes that are available on the machine. HD3 Save Program Typeselect the program type used when exporting

3 - 6 Utilities

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

conversational programs to the HD3 file format. Choices for HWM and HD3 Program Types are: Standard = 3-axis Rotary A or Rotary B = 4-axis Rotary A, Tilt B, or Tilt A, Rotary C = 5-axis Warn Before Saving in Old Formatselect Yes to display a warning message when a program is about to be saved in the HD3 file format, which may not support some conversational features. Data Block Tool Entry Feed and Speed Updatespecify how tool feeds and speeds should be updated when a tool is changed in a data block.

NC Settings
NC Settings fields are: NC Dialectselect Basic or Industry Standard NC. NC Display Typeselect axes data: Standard = 3-axis Rotary A or Rotary B = 4-axis Rotary A, Tilt B or Tilt A, Rotary C = 5-axis Universal Rotary = all types Exported NC Decimal Placesindicate the number of decimal places expressed when exporting a conversational program as NC (range is 1-8); desktop version only BPRNT/DPRNT Output Deviceselect where to output BPRINT and DPRINT formatted data; desktop version only. BPRNT/DPRNT Output Filespecify the file path if BPRINT and DPRINT data will be output to a file; desktop version only. Custom NC File Extensionprovide a custom filename extension to enable loading of NC files that use the extension. Disable Tool Length Offset Tableselect Yes to disable access to the Tool Length Offsets table in Tool Setup. Default is No. When Yes, Tool Length Offsets are cleared and only the Radius Offsets table can be accessed in Tool Setup. Save NC State with Programwhen set to Yes, an NC State file is saved with the NC program, in the same directory and with the same name. Default is No.

NC Variable Monitoring settings: Enable Variable Monitoringselect Yes to enable monitoring of an NC variable during the program run. Default is No.
704-0116-115 Utilities 3-7

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Monitored Variable Numberspecify the variable number to be monitored. Enable Reset at Program Startselect Yes to enable variable reset at the start of program run. Variable Reset Valueenter the variable reset value.

Autosave Settings
Autosave Settings fields are: ENABLE AUTOMATIC SAVEturn Autosave on or off; if Yes, programs are saved to memory at the time interval specifiedit will not save to the source location of the program. SAVE FREQUENCYspecify number of minutes between each autosave; range is 1-255. SAVE ACTIVE PROGRAM ONLYspecify Yes to save only the current program; specify No to save all loaded programs; default is No.

Tool Utilities and Settings

General tab
The Tool Utilities and Settings screen is accessed from Utilities/User Preferences. Fields vary dependent on whether the Tool and Material Library option is loaded. With the Tool & Material Library option, fields are: Tool Calibration Modesets the method used to calibrate tools. Zero Calibrationstores the tip of tool dimension relative to home position (machine zero in z axis). See Zero Calibration Mode, on page 4 20 for more information. Absolute Tool Lengthstores the actual length of the tool from spindle nose to the tip of tool. See Absolute Tool Length mode, on page 4 - 17 for more information. This is the default setting.

Use Tool Type Checkingonly allow the selection of tool types that are valid for the operation in conversational mode: YESonly the tools that are valid for the data block can be selected (i.e., drills and taps displayed for hole operations) NOallows any tool to be selected for any data block

Update Data Blocks With Tool ChangesUpdate feeds and speeds in conversational data blocks when tool feeds and speeds are changed. Specify if update this should occur automatically, prompt first, or should not update. Replace In Filesspecify if new tool feeds and speeds should be updated in current editing file only or in all open files.

Matching tab
Automatically Load Unmatched Tools As Manualautomatically loads

3 - 8 Utilities

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

unmatched tools from newly-loaded conversational part programs: YESnew tools from the newly loaded program (that are not in the Tool & Material Library) are automatically added to Manual. NOrequires new tools to be matched (see Part Program Tool Review section for more information about matching tools.)

Overwrite Existing Zero Calibration (Zero Calibration mode)when matching tools during a program load, the zero calibration from the program replaces the calibration for the tool on the machine. Default is YES. The OVERWRITE EXISTING ZERO CALIBRATION setting applies both to tools that are automatically matched (during a program load), as well as tools that are manually matched.

Maximum Diameter Differencethe maximum diameter difference for a tool to be considered a match.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Utilities 3-9

Life Monitoring tab

Enable Tool Life Monitoringselect Yes to enable tool wear monitoring. When enabled, the current cutting time is compared to the maximum cutting time set for the tool in Tool Setup Cutting Time field. Display Warning Messagespecify if you want a warning message to post when a tools maximum cutting time is exceeded. Mark Tool Defectivewhen set to Yes, the program run will abort when attempting to change to a tool that has exceeded its maximum cutting time. The Life Monitoring tab is not displayed if the Tool & Material Library option is not installed.

3 - 10 Utilities

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Machine Parameters
The Machine Parameters screens list various parameters, the range of values that can be set for each parameter, and the current set or default value. The values of the Machine Parameters may be changed by the operator. The machine, part, and/or tool may be damaged if parameters are changed without understanding the machine operation that may be affected by the change. The fields that will be displayed on the Machine Parameters screens are dependent upon machine type. The values shown on the following screen figures are the default factory settings for HMX and VTX series machines. Follow these steps to access the Machine Parameters screens: 1. Select the AUXILARY console key. 2. Select the Utility Screen icon. 3. Select the USER PREFERENCES F2 softkey. 4. Select the MACHINE PARAMETERS F6 softkey.

Figure 32. Machine Parameters, Page 1

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Utilities 3-11

Machine Parameters - Page 1 Parameter

Coolant Delay Time Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable

Description
Sets the time the program pauses when the coolant is enabled. Sets the Washdown Coolant pump run cycle; used in conjunction with other washdown coolant parameters. Controls washdown coolant flow on the right side of the machine enclosure on certain machines. Used in conjunction with other washdown coolant parameters. Controls washdown coolant flow on the left side of the machine enclosure on certain machines. Used in conjunction with other washdown coolant parameters. Sets the time the washdown coolant flow cycle is paused, on certain machines. Defines the time the washdown coolant pump is on; used with Washdown Off Delay Timer. Defines the time the washdown coolant pump is off; used with Washdown On Delay Timer. Turns the control off after the specified period of inactivity. Turns off the Tool Picker option. Sets a dual-zone capable machine as either a single long bed machine, or as a dual-zone machine.

Range
0-60 seconds 0 (continuous) 1 (pulsating) 2 (delay) 0-32767 (.01 sec)

Default
0 0 or 1 (depends on machine) 500 or 1000 (depends on machine)

Alt Washdown Dwell

Alt Dwell Lt Side

0-32767 (.01 sec)

200

Alt Washdown Off Time Washdown On Delay Timer Washdown Off Delay Timer Control Power Off Time Disable Tool Picker Option Enable Dual Zones

0-32767 (.01 sec) 0-9999 seconds 0-9999 seconds 0-255 minutes 0 (enable) 1 (disable) 0 (1 zone long bed) 1 (dual zones)

0 or 200 (depends on machine) 0

120 0 1

3 - 12 Utilities

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Coolant Parameters
The coolant parameters are used to control coolant flow to the spindle (known as flood coolant), coolant flow in the machine enclosure (known as washdown coolant), or to turn the washdown coolant pump on or off. The Washdown Coolant Pump must be On for Right and Left side operation. Some coolant parameters may not be functional on your machine. For examples of how to use washdown coolant parameters on your Hurco machine, see Table 31.Washdown Coolant Parameter Examples, on page 3 - 19. Washdown coolant flow for VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, and VMX60 machines is continuos to both sides of the enclosure. The amount of washdown coolant used during machining operations is controlled by cycling the washdown coolant pump. VMX64 and VMX84 machines are equipped with a butterfly solenoid that alternates washdown coolant flow between the right and left sides of the machine enclosure. This is the washdown coolant flow cycle for VMX64 and VMX84 machines: 1. Coolant flows on right side of machine enclosure (defined in Alt Washdown Dwell). 2. Pause time of no coolant flow (defined in Alt Washdown Off Time). 3. Coolant flows on left side of machine enclosure (defined in Alt Dwell Lt Side). 4. Pause time of no coolant flow (defined in Alt Washdown Off Time). The amount of washdown coolant used during machining operations for VMX64 and VMX84 machines is controlled by the time washdown coolant flows/pauses to each side of the machine enclosure, and/or by cycling the washdown coolant pump. VMX64 and VMX84 machines are equipped with a separate Factory-configured timer to control the Y-axis rear way cover washdown on and off cycles. These coolant parameters are found on Page 1 of Machine Parameters: Coolant Delay Time Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable Alt Washdown Dwell Alt Dwell Lt Side Alt Washdown Off Time Washdown On Delay Timer Washdown Off Delay Timer

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Utilities 3-13

Coolant Delay Time

The Coolant Delay Time parameter pauses the running part program for the indicated time whenever the program enables the primary or secondary flood coolant. Set the Coolant Delay Time parameter to pause the program long enough to allow flood coolant to pump from the coolant tank to the head-mounted nozzles around the spindle before the tool enters the workpiece. The default setting for Coolant Delay Time is 0 seconds.

Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable

This parameter is used with other washdown coolant features to regulate washdown coolant flow for continuous clearing of chips from the machine enclosure. Parameter operation is determined by machine type. VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, VMX60use this parameter to manage washdown coolant flow: When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 0, washdown coolant will continuously flow on the right and left sides of the machine enclosure. Values in the Alt Washdown Dwell, Alt Dwell Lt Side, or Alt Washdown Off Time will have no effect on washdown coolant operation. When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1, do not use this setting for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, or VMX60 machine. If unexpected performance occurs, refer to the Machine Maintenance section of the Maintenance and Safety Manual. When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 2, the washdown coolant pump will cycle for the times defined in Washdown Delay On Timer and Washdown Delay Off Timer. The default setting for Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable is 0.

VMX64, VMX84use this parameter to alternate washdown coolant flow on the machine enclosure: When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 0, do not use this setting for a VMX64 or VMX84 machine. If unexpected performance occurs, refer to the Machine Maintenance section of the Maintenance and Safety Manual. When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1, washdown coolant flow will cycle for the times defined in Alt Washdown Dwell, Alt Dwell Lt Side and Alt Washdown Off Time. When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable parameter = 2, the washdown coolant pump will cycle for the times defined in Washdown On Delay Timer and Washdown Off Delay Timer, whether or not washdown coolant flow is alternating in the machine enclosure. The default setting for Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable is 1.

Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable is not functional for HMX, VM, and VTXU machines.

3 - 14 Utilities

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Alt Washdown Dwell

This parameter controls the time washdown coolant flows on the right side of the machine enclosure. Alt Washdown Dwell is used with Alt Washdown Off Time to define the washdown coolant flow cycle on the right side of the machine enclosure. The value for Alt Washdown Dwell in 0.01 sec increments, so a value of 500 equates to 5 sec. Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable must be set to 1 or 2 to use Alt Washdown Dwell. Parameter operation is determined by machine type. VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, VMX60 When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1, do not use this setting for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50 or VMX60 machine. If unexpected performance occurs, refer to the Machine Maintenance section of the Maintenance and Safety Manual. When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 2, Alt Washdown Dwell is not functional; entering a value in Alt Washdown Dwell will have no effect on washdown coolant flow for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50 or VMX60 machine. The default setting for Alt Washdown Dwell is 500 (5 seconds), but set this parameter to 0 to avoid unexpected performance. If unexpected performance occurs, refer to the Machine Maintenance section of the Maintenance and Safety Manual.

VMX64When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1 or 2, define the time for washdown coolant to flow on the right side of the machine enclosure. The default setting for Alt Washdown Dwell is 500 (5 seconds).

VMX84When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1 or 2, define the time for washdown coolant to flow on the right side of the machine enclosure. The default setting for Alt Washdown Dwell is 1000 (10 seconds).

Alternating Washdown Dwell is not functional for HMX, VM, and VTXU machines.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Utilities 3-15

Alt Dwell Lt Side

On VMX60, VMX64, and VMX84 machines, this parameter controls the time washdown coolant flows on the left side of the machine enclosure. Alt Dwell Lt Side is used with Alt Washdown Off Time to cycle washdown coolant flow on the left side of the machine enclosure. The value for Alt Dwell Lt Side is in 0.01 sec increments, so a value of 500 equates to 5 sec. Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable must be set to 1 or 2 to use Alt Dwell Lt Side. Parameter operation is determined by machine type. VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, VMX60Alt Dwell Lt Side is not functional; entering a value in Alt Dwell Lt Side will not affect washdown coolant flow for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50 or VMX60 machine. The default setting for Alt Washdown Dwell is 200 (2 seconds), but you should set this parameter to 0 to avoid unexpected performance. If unexpected performance occurs, refer to the Machine Maintenance section of the Maintenance and Safety Manual.

VMX64, VMX84define the time for washdown coolant to flow on the left side of the machine enclosure. Alt Dwell Lt Side will only function if the Alt Washdown Dwell is greater than 0. If the value of Alt Washdown Dwell is 0, the machine will ignore Alt Dwell Lt Side and washdown coolant will not flow on either side of the machine enclosure. If Alt Dwell Lt Side = 0 and Alt Washdown Dwell is greater than 0, washdown coolant will flow to the left side of the enclosure for the time defined in Alt Washdown Dwell. The default setting for Alt Dwell Lt Side is 200 (2 seconds).

Alternating Dwell Left Side is not functional for HMX, VM, and VTXU machines.

3 - 16 Utilities

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Alt Washdown Off Time

On VMX64 and VMX84 machines, this parameter defines the pause time in the washdown coolant flow cycle. The value is in 0.01 sec increments, so a value of 500 equates to 5 sec. Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable must be set to 1 or 2 to use Alt Washdown Off Time. Parameter operation is determined by machine type. VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, VMX60 - Alt Washdown Off Time is not functional; entering a value in Alt Washdown Off Time will not affect washdown coolant flow for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50 or VMX60 machine. The default setting for Alt Washdown Off Time is 0; this parameter is not functional for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, or VMX60 machine.

VMX64, VMX84When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1 or 2, washdown coolant flow will pause for the time indicated in the Alt Washdown Off Time after coolant flow on each side of the enclosure. If Alt Washdown Off Time is set to 0, the washdown off-time is 0.7 sec. The default setting for Alt Washdown Off Time is 200 (2 seconds).

Alternating Washdown Off Time is not functional for HMX, VM, and VTXU machines.

Washdown On Delay Timer

This parameter defines the time (in seconds) the washdown coolant pump is On, and is used with the Washdown Off Delay Timer to manage coolant usage. The default setting for Washdown On Delay Timer is 0 seconds. Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable must be set to 2 to use Washdown On Delay Timer. VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, VMX60washdown coolant flow will be continuous to both sides of the machine enclosure during the time the washdown coolant pump is On. VMX64, VMX84the washdown coolant pump is On for the time defined, whether or not washdown coolant flow is alternating in the machine enclosure. Table 31.Washdown Coolant Parameter Examples, on page 3 - 19 shows an example where the washdown coolant pump cycles on and off while washdown coolant flow is alternating on the machine enclosure. It is recommended that you follow this formula: Washdown On Delay Timer = Alt Washdown Dwell + Washdown Off Delay Timer + ALT Dwell Left Side + Washdown Off Delay Timer See Table 31.Washdown Coolant Parameter Examples, on page 3 19. The default setting for Washdown On Delay Timer is 0 seconds.

This parameter defines the time (in seconds) the washdown coolant pump is On, and is used with the Washdown Off Delay Timer to manage coolant usage. Washdown On Delay Timer is not functional for VM machines.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Utilities 3-17

Washdown Off Delay Timer

This parameter defines the time (in seconds) the washdown coolant pump is Off, and is used with the Washdown On Delay Timer to manage coolant usage. The functionality of this feature is dependent upon machine type. Washdown Off Delay Timer is not functional for VM machines. Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable must be set to 2 to use this parameter. VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, VMX60defines the time the washdown coolant pump is Off. VMX64, VMX84defines the time the washdown coolant pump is Off, whether or not coolant flow is alternating in the machine enclosure. It is recommended that you follow this formula: Washdown Off Delay Timer = Alt Washdown Dwell + Washdown On Delay Timer + Alt Dwell Left Side + Washdown On Delay Timer See Table 31.Washdown Coolant Parameter Examples, on page 3 19. Washdown Off Delay Timer should be calculated using even multiples of its value, increasing it by that value. For example, if the calculated value is 30, then you can increase it to 60, 90, etc. The default setting for Washdown Off Delay Timer is 0 seconds.

3 - 18 Utilities

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Examples for Coolant Parameters Use

VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, and VMX60 N95 Codes (Integrator Configuration Parameters)
247 0 2 228 0 0 248 0 0 249 0 0 297 0 20 298 0 45 Result

Continuous washdown coolant flow. 1. Washdown coolant pump on for 20 sec. 2. Pump off for 45 sec. 3. Cycle repeats.

VMX64, VMX84 N95 Codes (Integrator Configuration Parameters)

2471 228 248 249 297 298 Result

800

600

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Right side washdown coolant for 8 sec. No coolant for 0.7 sec. Left side washdown coolant for 6 sec. No coolant for 0.7 sec. Cycle repeats. Right side washdown coolant for 8 sec. No coolant for 2.5 sec. Left side washdown coolant for 6 sec. No coolant for 2.5 sec. Cycle repeats.

800

600

250

1000

1000

500

30

60

1. Right side washdown coolant for 10 sec. 2. No coolant for 5 sec. 3. Left side washdown coolant for 10 sec. 4. No coolant for 5 sec. 5. Washdown coolant pump on for 30 sec during right & left cycles. 6. Pump off for 60 sec. 7. Cycle repeats.

1. A value of 3 programmed for N95:247 enables control of the Y-Axis Washdown. Key to N95 Code Column Headings for Tables Above Integrator Configuration Parameter N95:247 N95:228 N95:248 N95:249 N95:297 N95:298
Table 31.

Definition
Pulsating or Delay WD Enable Alt WD Dwell Alt Dwell Lt Side Alt WD Off Time WD On Delay Timer WD Off Delay Timer

Washdown Coolant Parameter Examples

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Utilities 3-19

Control Power Off Time

Turns the control off after the specified period of activity. The default setting for Control Power Off Time is 120 minutes.

Disable Tool Picker Option

Turns off the Tool Fixture (TPS) option, if it is present on your VM, VMX, or VTXU machine. Refer to the Tool Fixture (TPS) chapter in the Options manual. The default setting for Disable Tool Picker Option is 0. The Disable Tool Picker Option parameter is not functional on HMX machines.

Enable Dual Zones

This parameter enables zones on a dual-zone machine. 0 sets both zones as a single long bed machine, and 1 sets the zones as separate zones. The default is 1. Select the Page 2 F2 softkey to access Machine Parameters Page 2:

Figure 33. Machine Parameters, HMX (left) and VTXU (right), Page 2

3 - 20 Utilities

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Machine Parameters - Page 2 Parameter

CAL to LS Velocity X, Y, Z

Description
Sets the feedrate for the X, Y, or Z axis as it moves toward the calibration limit switch during a machine calibration cycle. See Cal to LS Velocity Parameters. Sets the feedrate for the A, B, or C axis as it moves toward the calibration limit switch during a machine calibration cycle. See Cal to LS Velocity Parameters. Adjusts the balance between the motion card and the servo drives at the start of calibration and run program. Disables all automatic tool changer functions. Enables or disables the Rapid Override potentiometer on the console. Sets the position for the tilt axis during an automatic tool change when the Table Safety Move parameter is set to Yes for an Automatic Tool Change. Sets the absolute X axis machine location to which the table will move when the Table Safety Move parameter is set to Yes for an Automatic Tool Change. See X-Axis and Y-Axis Safety Position. Sets the absolute Y axis machine location to which the table will move when the Table Safety Move parameter is set to Yes for an Automatic Tool Change. See X-Axis and Y-Axis Safety Position. On HMX only, moves the Z-axis to zero position at the end of a tool change.

Range
100-2540 MMPM

Default
1270

CAL to LS Velocity A, B, C

100-2540 DPM

Auto Balance Enable

0 (disable) 1 (enable) 0 (enable) 1 (disable) 0 (enable) 1 (disable) 0-360 degrees

ATC Disable Rapid Override Disable Tilt Axis Safety Position

0 0 0

X-Axis Safety Position

Travel Limits (mm)

Y-Axis Safety Position

Travel Limits (mm)

ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position

0 (disable) 1 (enable)

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Utilities 3-21

Cal to LS Velocity Parameters

The Cal to LS Velocity parameters set the feed rate for each axis as it is moving towards the calibration limit switch during a machine calibration cycle. Only the axes that are present on the machine need to be set. The units are indicated in parentheses and can be MMPM (millimeters per minute), IPM (inches per minute), or DPM (degrees per minute). The default setting for Calibrate to Limit Switch Velocity is 1270 MMPM (50 IPM) for the X, Y, and Z axes. The range for Cal to LS Velocity values for the X, Y, and Z axes is 100 MMPM to 2540 MMPM. The default setting for Calibrate to LS Velocity is 0 DPM for the A, B, and C axes. The range for Cal to LS Velocity values for the A, B, and C axes is 100 DPM to 2540 DPM. The default setting for Calibrate to Limit Switch Velocity is 1270 mmpm (50 IPM) for X, Y, and Z axes. The default setting for Calibrate to Limit Switch Velocity is 1000 mmpm (39.37 IPM) for A axis on a VTXU machine. The default setting for Calibrate to Limit Switch Velocity is 2000 (78.74 IPM) mmpm for B axis on an HMX machine. The default setting for Calibrate to Limit Switch Velocity is 1000 mmpm (50 IPM) for C axis on a VTXU machine.

Auto Balance Enable

Auto Balance Enable set to 1 will have the logic controller send an auto balance request to adjust the balance between the motion card and the servo drives at the start of calibration and run program. No auto balance request will be sent if the parameter is 0. The default setting for Auto Balance Enable is 1.

ATC and Rapid Override Disable Parameters

ATC Disable
The ATC Disable parameter allows the user to completely disable all automatic tool change functions. Setting the ATC Disable parameter to 1 disables the Auto Tool Change button (for performing tool changes in Manual mode or Tool Setup) and the Auto Tool Change in Auto mode button (for running programs). With ATC Disable set to 1, all tools will have to be inserted and removed manually using the Spindle Clamp/Unclamp button mounted on the head. When ATC is disabled, the Control assumes that the ATC is in a safe position to allow normal X, Y, and Z axis movement. Input status for the ATC at home position will not be checked. Failure to ensure that the ATC is in a safe position may result in machine damage. The default setting for ATC Disable is 0.

Rapid Override Disable

3 - 22 Utilities

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

The Rapid Override Disable parameter allows the user to enable or disable the Rapid Override potentiometer on the console. Rapid Override Disable set to 1 disables the Rapid Override potentiometer so that all rapid movements in an automatic operation will be at the programmed setting. Rapid Override Disable set to 0 enables the Rapid Override so that rapid movements in an automatic operation may be adjusted slower than the programmed setting. The default setting for Rapid Override Disable parameter is 0.

Axis Safety Position Parameters

Tilt Axis Safety Position
The Tilt Axis Safety Position parameter sets the position for the tilt axis on the VTXU machine during an ATC if either one of the following conditions occurs: the Move to Safe Pos During TC parameter is set to Yes (for Auto Run mode). the Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC parameter (for Manual or Input modes) is set to 1.

After the Z retracts before the ATC, the tilt axis moves to the position indicated in degrees. After the automatic tool change completes, the tilt axis returns to the original position. The default setting for Tilt Axis Safety Position is 0. The Tilt Axis Safety Position parameter is not functional for HMX machines, VM machines, or VMX machines.

X-Axis and Y-Axis Safety Position

The X-Axis Safety Position and Y-Axis Safety Position parameters determine the absolute X-axis and Y-axis machine locations, in millimeters, to which the table will move when the Table Safety Move parameter is set to Yes for an Automatic Tool Change. See Program Parameters for more information.During an automatic tool change with the Table Safety Move set to Yes: 1. The Z-axis will retract to maximum position. 2. The X-axis and Y-axis will move at rapid feedrate to the X-Axis Safety Position and the Y-Axis Safety Position, respectively. 3. The automatic tool change will complete. 4. The X-axis and Y-axis will move at rapid feedrate to the previous X-axis and Yaxis positions before the move to the X-Axis and Y-Axis Safety Positions.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Utilities 3-23

The X-Axis Safety Position value must not exceed the minimum or maximum travel limits for the X-axis. The Y-Axis Safety Position value must not exceed the minimum or maximum travel limits for the Y-axis. If the Table Safety Move parameter is set to No, these parameters are not used, and steps 1, 2, and 4 above are not executed for an automatic tool change. The default setting for X-Axis Safety Position is 0.000 mm. The default setting for Y-Axis Safety Position is 0.000 mm. The X-Axis and Y-Axis Safety Position parameters are not functional for HMX machines.

ATC Z-Axis Parameter

ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position
This parameter is functional only on an HMX machine. The ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position parameter moves the Z-axis to the zero (0) position at the end of either an Auto or Manual tool change. ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position set to 0 disables the parameter. ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position set to 1 enables the parameter. The default setting for ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position is 0. ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position parameter is not functional for VTXU, VM, or VMX machines. Select the Page 3 F3 softkey to access Machine Parameters Page 3:

Figure 34. Machine Parameters, Page 3

3 - 24 Utilities

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Machine Parameter - Page 3 Parameter

Aux Output 1, 2, 3, 4 Confirmation Enable Disable Aux Out 1, 2, 3, 4 During Interrupt Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable Chip Conveyor On Delay Time Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time

Description
Enables a confirmation signal for completion of each Auxiliary M-code Output. Disables the specified Auxiliary M-code Output when an Interrupt cycle is selected during Auto Run mode. Manual Mode ATC operations are performed at Safety Position when enabled. Enables the Chip Conveyor Delay. Sets the time the Chip Conveyor cycles on, when Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay is enabled. Sets the time the Chip Conveyor cycles off, when Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay is enabled.

Range
0 (disable 1 (enable) 0 (enable) 1 (disable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 0-9999 seconds 0-9999 seconds

Default
0

0 0

Aux Output Parameters

Aux Output 1, 2, 3, 4 Confirmation Enable
Aux Output Confirmation Enable set to 1 enables a confirmation signal for completion of each Auxiliary M-code Output. The program pauses until the confirmation signal is detected. A setting of 0 will not require a confirmation signal and will not pause the program during the Auxiliary M-code Output. The default setting for each Auxiliary Output Confirmation Enable is 0.

Disable Aux Out 1, 2, 3, 4 During Interrupt

When set to 1, the parameter Disable Aux Output During Interrupt disables the specified Auxiliary M-code Output when an Interrupt cycle is selected during Auto Run mode. Upon return to Auto Run mode, the Auxiliary M-code Output will automatically be re-enabled. However, if another mode is selected, then the Auxiliary M-code Output will remain disabled until activated again in Auto Run mode. A setting of 0 will leave the Auxiliary M-code Output enabled when an Interrupt cycle is selected during Auto Run mode. It will remain enabled after exit from Interrupt cycle, even when accessing a mode other than Auto Run. The default setting for Disable Aux Out During Interrupt is 0 (enable).

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Utilities 3-25

Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC

When the Move to Safety Post Manual Mode ATC operations parameter is set to 0 for an ATC command, the Z axis moves to tool change height and the ATC is completed at the current X and Y axis position. The default setting for Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC is 0 (disable). If this parameter is set to 1, then: 1. The Z axis moves at rapid to zero. 2. The X and Y axes move at rapid to the X- and Y-axis safety positions. 3. The Z axis moves to tool change height. 4. The automatic tool change is completed. 5. The Z axis moves to zero. 6. The X and Y axes move at rapid back to the previous X and Y position.

Chip Conveyor Parameters

Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable, Chip Conveyor On Delay Time and Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time parameters are functional only when the Chip Removal Forward On/Off F2 softkey (Automatic Run Mode) is set to On.

Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable

The Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable parameter is used with the Chip Conveyer On Delay Time and Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time parameters to periodically allow the chip conveyor or auger to remove chips from inside the machine during the part program. When Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable is set to 0, this parameter is disabled. Values entered into the Chip Conveyor On Delay Time and Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time will not be retained. When Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable is set to 1, use the Chip Conveyor On Delay Time and Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time parameters to regulate operation of the chip conveyor or auger. The default setting for Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable is 0 (disable).

Chip Conveyor On Delay Time

When the Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable parameter is set to 1, the Chip Conveyor On Delay Time parameter defines the time that the chip conveyor or auger cycles On to remove chips from inside the enclosure. The default setting for Chip Conveyor On Delay Time is 0 seconds.

Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time

When the Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable parameter is set to 1, the Chip Conveyor

3 - 26 Utilities

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Off Delay Time parameter sets the time that the chip conveyor or auger cycles Off. When the chip conveyor or auger cycles Off, the screen status display is FWD-Delay, not Stopped. The default setting for Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time is 0 seconds. Select the Page 4 F4 softkey to access Machine Parameters Page 4:

Figure 35. Machine Parameters, Page 4

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Utilities 3-27

Machine Parameters - Page 4 Parameter

Warm-Up Cycle Time Per Pass Warm-Up Starting Speed Warm-Up Speed Steps Warm-Up Max Spindle Speed Warm-Up Axis Feed Rate Disable Auto On Chip Removal Axis Feedrate Override Min (%) Axis Feedrate Override Max (%) Rapid Feedrate Override Min (%) Rapid Feedrate Override Max (%) Dual Tool Probe Present Enable Retract ZAxis on Power Loss

Description
Sets the time for each step of the warmup cycle. Sets the spindle speed for the initial step of the warm-up cycle. Sets spindle speed increments for each step of the warm-up cycle. Sets the spindle speed for the final step of the warm-up cycle. Sets the axis feed rate for each step of the warm-up cycle. Disables chip conveyor from turning on automatically in AUTO mode. Sets the Axis Feedrate Override Minimum value. Not accessible by the user. Contact a Hurco Certified Service representative for assistance. Sets the Rapid Feedrate Override Minimum value. Not accessible by the user. Contact a Hurco Certified Service representative for assistance. Sets tool probe in one or both zones of dual-zone machines. Enables Z-axis retract upon power loss, when an M91 is present.

Range
60-600 0-25% Max RPM 0-25% Max RPM 0-Max RPM

Default
120 1000 2000 Machines maximum spindle RPM 2920 0 10% 150

0-Max Rapid 0-1 0-99% 101-200

0-200% 0-200

10% 100

0 (one) 1 (both) 0 (disable) 1 (enable)

0 0

3 - 28 Utilities

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Warm Up Parameters
These parameters allow the operator to configure the machines daily warm-up cycle. Warm-up Cycle Time Per Pass Warm-up Starting Speed Warm-up Speed Steps Warm-up Max Spindle Speed Warm-up Axis Feed Rate The Z-axis is at zero and does not move during the machine warmup. Tool In Spindle setting must be 0 before beginning Warm Up Machine. For the VM1G machine, a tool must be in the spindle before beginning Warm Up Machine. When the warm-up cycle is initiated: Spindle speeds up to the Warm-up Starting Speed RPM for the time indicated in the Warm-up Cycle Time per Pass field. X and Y axes move diagonally from corner to corner at the Warm-up Axis Feed Rate. The machine then steps through the warm-up cycle until the Warm-up Max Spindle Speed is reached. The length of each step is defined by the Warm-Up Cycle Time per Pass. During each step of the cycle, the spindle speed will increase to the Warm-up Speed Steps RPM and the axes will run at the Warm-up Axis Feed Rate. Altering the default daily warm-up parameters may lead to inadequate machine warm up that can negatively impact spindle operations and may void the Hurco warranty. See Machine Warm-up for warm-up cycles for a new spindle or a machine that was idle 30 days or more.

Disable Auto On Chip Removal

The Disable Auto On Chip Removal parameter disables the chip conveyor from turning on automatically in Auto Mode. The range is 0 or 1; 0 is the default. Setting the parameter to 1 will disable the Auto On Chip Removal feature.

Axis Feedrate Override Min (%)

Sets the Axis Feedrate Override Minimum value. This value cannot be greater than or equal to the maximum value.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Utilities 3-29

Rapid Feedrate Override Min (%)

Sets the Rapid Feedrate Override Minimum value. This value cannot be greater than or equal to the maximum value.

Dual Tool Probe Present

The Dual Tool Probe Present parameter sets tool probe in one or both zones of dual-zone machines. 0 specifies there is one tool probe; 1 specifies there is a probe in each zone. The default is 0.

Enable Retract Z-Axis on Power Loss

Enables Z-axis retract on power loss. 0 disables the retract feature. 1 enables the Z-axis retract feature. Default is 0. This parameter must be used in conjunction with M90/M91. The Z-axis retracts upon power loss when this parameter is set to 1 and an M90 code (Z-axis Retract Enable) is inserted at the beginning of the program. The retract can be turned on and off within the program using M90 (on) and M91 (off). The Z-axis will not retract if the M90 code is not used in the program in conjunction with this parameter.

3 - 30 Utilities

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Estimated Run Time Parameters

Use the Estimated Run Time Parameters to make adjustments to certain machine operations in order to generate a more accurate estimated program run time. The Compute Estimated Run Time function on the Auto screen provides an estimate of the time it takes to run the current part program. Times entered on the Estimated Run Time Parameters screens are used in the calculation of the overall program run time estimate. Select the Estimated Run Time softkey from the Machine Parameters screens to view and enter Estimated Run Time Parameters. The values are saved upon exit.

Figure 36. Estimated Run Time Parameters for a horizontal milling machine

The available parameters are dependent on machine type. See Auto Mode, on page 5 - 27 for information about the Compute Estimated Run Time softkey.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Utilities 3-31

Serial Port Settings

Serial Port Settings allows you to set Port 1 and Port 2 settings for protocol, baud rate, character length, stop bits, and parity. The following fields appear on the Serial Port Settings screen. Refer to your hardware documentation for your equipments specific settings. ProtocolThe format in which the data is communicated. Choose from CTS/ RTS (hardware flow control), Xon/Xoff (software flow control), and Full Handshake. Baud RateThe communication speed rate. Choose a baud rate that is appropriate for your network from the drop-down list. Character LengthThe maximum number of bits sent back and forth at one time. Stop BitsStop bits signal the end of the transmission of data. Choose the size for the Stop Bit. ParityProvides simple error checking for the transmitted data. Select Even if the data bits plus the parity bit result in an even number of 1's Select Odd if the data bits plus the parity bit result in an odd number of 1s. Select None if there is no parity bit included in the transmission. When No is selected, its assumed that there are other forms of checking that will detect any errors in transmission. For example, suppose the data bits 01110001 are transmitted to your computer. If even parity is selected, then the parity bit is set to 0 by the transmitting device to produce an even number of 1's. If odd parity is selected, then the parity bit is set to 1 by the transmitting device to produce an odd number of 1's.

3 - 32 Utilities

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

FTP Server Settings

The WinMax console can serve as an FTP Server. The following fields appear on the FTP Server Settings screen. For more information refer to the UltiMonitor chapter in the Options manual. Enable FTP ServerEnable the WinMax Control to act as an FTP Server. FTP Server PortThe port number for FTP access. Maximum Idle Time (Mins)Maximum amount of time before connection is dropped. User NameThe log in name that will allow users access to the FTP Server. PasswordThe password that corresponds to the user name and allows access to the FTP Server. PathThe file path that the users will be allowed access to.

WinMax Uptime
The WinMax Uptime screen displays the start date time and runtime for the current session of Winmax.

Rotary Axes Parameters

Set the General Rotary Axes Parameters on this screen: Part Kinematics Z Referenceenter or store the Z axis position for the Part Kinematics Z Reference location. Rotary Axis ISO Standardspecifies if the positive direction of the rotary axis matches the ISO standard. Tilt Axis Preferencespecifies the tilt axis preference: neutral, positive, or negative. Neutral indicates no preference.

Set the specific A, B, C axes parameters (depending on configuration) by selecting the A/B/C Axis softkeys: Rotary Centerline X/Y/Zenter the machine coordinate for the center of rotation. Automatic Centerline Calculationspecify Yes or No to enable automatic centerline calculation. Machine Coordinate Relativespecify if the axis coordinates are machine relative.

For dual-zone machines, parameters can be set for each zone, on the Zone 1 and Zone 2 tabs.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Utilities 3-33

Select Language
Select and register a language on the Language Selection screen: 1. Select a language from the list. 2. Press the Load Language softkey to install the Language files. You can also press the F1 key to perform this function. The selected language is shown in the Current Language field.

Language Quick Toggle

You can toggle between two languages from any screen in WinMax using the Language Quick Toggle feature. To set the primary and secondary languages, highlight a language in the list and select the Set as Toggle Language 1 (for primary language) or Set as Toggle Language 2 (for secondary language). The selected languages are shown at the top of the screen:

Figure 37. Language Selection screen

Use Ctrl+L on the keyboard (or virtual keyboard) to switch back and forth between the languages on any screen in WinMax.

Data Logging Filters

Used for diagnostic purposes only.

3 - 34 Utilities

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Tool Path Support

Used for service purposes; requires a password to access.

Additional Utilities Softkeys

Printing Setup F3set printing preferences for program blocks, range of program blocks, program parameters, part setup, and tool setup. Integrator Support Services F4for diagnostics and machine configuration; password required for access. Restart Control F5exits all control operations, powers down, then restarts machine and control. Shutdown Control F6exits all control operations and powers down machine. Serial I/O F1to begin read/write program operations using screenport 1 or 2. Log Files F2displays error and status messages that have occurred during normal operation.

Printing Setup
The Printing Setup F3 softkey on the main Utilities screen provides access to the following printing functions: Part Program Printingprint part program elements. Tool Information Printingprint the Tool Library or save it to file. Probing Data Printingprint probing part inspection files. Serial Numbers Printingprint a report that lists used Serial Numbers.

Part Program Printing

In the Part Program Printing screen you can choose to print some or all of the following elements: Program Blocks (all or a range) Program Parameters Part Setup Tool Setup

After checking the desired elements, select the PRINTING F3 softkey. A pop-up window appears that contains the selected data. The information can be viewed by selecting the

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Utilities 3-35

heading to expand the section; select the heading again to hide the information. The following softkeys appear in the pop-up window: Print Previewdisplays the part program information as it will appear when printed. Printsends the information to the printer. Save Assaves the information as a text file to an external drive. Closecloses the pop-up window.

Tool Information Printing

Tool Information Printing is available only with the Tool and Material Library option. The TOOL INFORMATION PRINTING F6 softkey on the Tool Utilities and Settings screen allows you to view and print tool information for all tools saved in the Tool Library:

Print tool list Save tool list

Figure 38. Tool Information and Printing

Select the PRINT button on the Tool Information pop-up to print a list of tools and settings, as in the following example: ATC Tool Number: 23 Tool Type: Ball End Mill Tool Diameter is 0.0938 inches. Tool length is 0.5625 inches. Length of cut is 0.4688 inches. Number of flutes is 0 inches. Direction of Spindle Rotation is Clockwise. Helix Angle is 0.
704-0116-115

3 - 36 Utilities

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Shank Diameter is 0.0938 inches. Apt Gear Ratio is 1. Apt Tool Number is 1. Apt Diameter Offset is 1. Apt Length offset is 1. Simulation Color is SEQUENTIAL. MTC Tool Number: 1 Tool Type: Drill Tool Diameter is 0.031 inches. Tool length is 5 inches. Length of cut is 5 inches. Number of flutes is 0 inches. Direction of Spindle Rotation is Clockwise. Drill Angle is 118.000000. Helix Angle is 0. Shank Diameter is 0.031 inches. Apt Gear Ratio is 1. Apt Tool Number is 1. Apt Diameter Offset is 1. Apt Length offset is 1. Simulation Color is SEQUENTIAL. Tool Number: 20 Tool Type: Cutting Tap Tool Diameter is 0.216 inches. Tool length is 1.296 inches. Length of cut is 1.08 inches. Tap Direction: Right Hand. Tap Chamfer: Bottoming. Thread Pitch is 0.0417 inches. Thread Diameter is 0.216 inches. Helix Angle is 0. Flute Style: Spiral Flute. Shank Diameter is 0.216 inches. Apt Gear Ratio is 1. Apt Tool Number is 1. Apt Diameter Offset is 1. Apt Length offset is 1. Simulation Color is SEQUENTIAL.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Utilities 3-37

Probing Data Printing

When Probing Part Inspection files are generated, they are saved to the same location and with the same filename as the part program with a .TXT filename extension. For example, the Part Inspection file for the program SAMPLE.HWM is SAMPLE.TXT. Part Inspection files are printed from the control using the PROBING DATA PRINTING softkey: 1. Select the PRINTING SETUP F3 softkey from Utilities. 2. Select the PROBING DATA PRINTING F3 softkey. 3. Locate the Part Inspection file from the Locate Probing Data Files screen. 4. Select the PRINT F1 softkey to print the file. Subsequent Part Inspection data from the same part program is appended to the existing Part Inspection file for that program.

Serial Numbers Printing

You can print a report that lists the Serial Numbers already used in the part program: 1. Select the Printing Setup softkey from Utilities. 2. Select Serial Numbers Printing softkey. 3. The report is displayed in a pop-up window. Select the Print softkey.

Integrator Support Services

The Integrator Support Services screen requires a password to access and is for Hurco Certified Technicians use in configuring and setting up the machine.

3 - 38 Utilities

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Serial I/O
Two serial ports are available on the control. The Serial I/O screen contains Status and Bytes Transferred fields for both ports. In addition, there are read, write, and abort softkeys for both ports. These are the fields on the Serial I/O screen: Statusstatus of serial port. Bytes Transferrednumber of bytes transferred.

These softkeys are available on the Serial I/O screen. Duplicate sets of fields and softkeys are available on the Serial I/O screen for Port 1 and Port 2. Begin Reading from Portbrings up 2 softkey choices: READ NC FROM PORT and READ CONV FROM PORT to identify the program format to read. Begin Writing to Portwrites the program to the port. Abort Port Operationhalts the read or write operation for the port.

Log Files
WinMax provides two log files that are accessed with the Log Files softkey, as well as status and error listings: Active Error Listing, on page 3 - 39 Active Status Listing, on page 3 - 40 Error History, on page 3 - 40 Status History, on page 3 - 41 Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files, on page 3 - 41 Export Log, on page 3 - 42

Active Error Listing

WinMax provides a list of the most recent error messages displayed, up to a maximum of 200 messages. Review messages when troubleshooting or to determine if a problem recurs. These are the softkeys on the Active Error Listing screen: Previous Page F1displays the error messages on the previous page of the Active Error Listing. Next Page F2displays the error messages on the next page of the Active Error Listing. Clear All F4clears all error messages from the Active Error Listing.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Utilities 3-39

Active Status Listing

The Active Status Listing screen displays current machine status messages. Each item will include time/date stamp, language file, language file index and the machine status message currently active in the system. Examples are messages such as MOTION HOLD HAS BEEN DEPRESSED, or LOW LUBE LEVEL. As each status changes back to a normal state, it will be removed from the list (see Status History, on page 3 - 41). Example: 10:53:39, STATUS.WRC, 32 CHIP DOOR(S) OPEN. These are the softkeys on the Active Status Listing screen: Previous Page F1displays the status messages on the previous page of the Active Error Listing. Next Page F2displays the status messages on the next page of the Active Error Listing. Clear All F4clears all status messages from the Active Status Listing.

Error History
The Error History screen displays a list of all system errors since the last power up (see Active Error Listing, on page 3 - 39). A plus sign + indicates when the error occurred and a minus sign - indicates when the error was cleared. Examples: Error occurred: 10:53:40, ERROR.WRC, 110, + SERVO FAULT Z AXIS. Error cleared: 10:57:32, ERROR.WRC, 110, SERVO FAULT Z AXIS. The history will also display part program errors generated during programming (interpreter errors). These errors will not display in the Active Error Listing since they are transient. Example: 11:39:21, COMPILER.WRC, 3, + ERROR IN BLOCK 1: TOOL 1 IS AN INVALID TOOL NUMBER.

3 - 40 Utilities

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Status History
The Status History screen displays a list of all system messages since the last power up (see Active Status Listing, on page 3 - 40). A plus sign + indicates when the status went active and a minus sign - indicates when the status returned to normal. Examples: Status went active: 10:53:39, STATUS.WRC, 32, + CHIP DOOR(S) OPEN. Status returned to normal: Log F 10:54:27, STATUS.WRC, 32, CHIP DOOR(S) OPEN.

Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files

When the Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files softkey is selected, a file manager screen opens with access to Log and Diagnostic files. Directories are displayed in the left pane; these include AtcMapLog, Communications, DumpFiles, NavErr, NavTap, NavESTOP, Profiles, ScreenCaptures, and ThreadMonitor. Select a directory to see its contents (the files) displayed in the right pane. To help distinguish between files, view the date and time they were created, which is displayed in the Date column. When it is necessary to copy certain files for service purposes, follow these steps: Due to the large size of some of the files, it is recommended to copy them from the Hurco machine to a USB flash memory device (128M or larger). 1. Attach the USB flash memory device to the external connector on the communications port on the machine. 2. Select the appropriate directory from the left-hand pane and select the file(s) you wish to copy from the right-hand pane. 3. Select the COPY softkey. 4. In the left-hand pane, select the USB flash memory device (will probably indicate it is E drive in parentheses). 5. Select the PASTE softkey. The files are now on the USB flash memory device, and can be transferred to a PC to be emailed.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Utilities 3-41

Export Log
The Export Log displays data that is lost or changed when a program is exported from WinMax (.HWM) to another format (.HD3, .FNC, etc.). Each time a program is exported from .HWM to another format, the data from the most recent export is displayed and the older data is erased. These are the softkeys on the Export Log screen: Previous Page F1displays the previous page if log is longer than one page. Next Page F2displays the next page if log is longer than one page. Clear All F4erases all information from the Export Log.

3 - 42 Utilities

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

PROGRAMMING BASICS
The following sections explain basic programming information for Conversational and NC programming, such as required setup, program checking, editing, and running of the program. Input Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Part Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Tool Calibration Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Tool Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Part Program Tool Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Tool Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Tool and Material Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Program Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Import / Export Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Copy and Change Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Review Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Manual Safety Override Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2 3 17 21 34 39 41 42 53 56 59 61 64

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-1

Input Mode
Input mode is used for part and tool setup, part programming, setting parameters, and other information entry. Press the Input key on the console to access the Input screen. The following softkeys appear on the Input screen: Part Setup F1access the Part Setup screen to establish part zero, centerline, offset Z, safety work region, and other parameters. Tool Review F2access the Tool Review screen for a summary listing of all tools used in active program (see Part Program Tool Review, on page 4 - 34 for more information). Part Programming F3access and create data blocks of a part program. The current program's data blocks appear on screen when this softkey is used. Delete, add, edit, and navigate through the data blocks. (See Part Programming in the Conversational Programming manual for more information.) The NC editor is displayed for NC programs. Program Parameters F4access General, Milling, Holes, Probing, and Performance parameters. NC parameters are accessible for NC programs. Import / Export Functions F5import parts of a previously saved Conversational program or NC state, export NC state to file, or import/export the tool library. Copy and Change Blocks F6make changes to several blocks at one time and/or copy and change blocks within the active program. Erase Functions F7erase sections of the current program. Program Manager F8access and manage other part programs.

Erase Functions
Erase functions erases (deletes) programs or components (part setup, tool setup, and program parameters). New WinMax features are: ERASE PART SETUP F1resets Part Setup to the default values. ERASE TOOL SETUP F2deletes tools in Manual Tools, Auto Tools, and spindle. The Erase Tool Setup softkey deletes ALL tools from the control, and cannot be undone. RESET PROGRAM PARAMETERS F3resets Program Parameters to the default values. ERASE PROGRAM F4deletes the part program data blocks but retains the program name. UNLOAD PROGRAM F5removes program from the Program Manager, including the filename. This does the same function as CLOSE PROGRAM in the Program Manager.

4 - 2 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Part Setup
See also: Part Setup Fields, on page 4 - 9 Part Setup Softkeys, on page 4 - 12 Part setup establishes the locations of part zero in X, Y, and Z relative to the machine's absolute zero. Part Zero may be located anywhere on the fixturing or the part. During machine calibration, each axis moves to its + or - travel limits. Machine zero, identified during machine calibration, is the location to which each axis moves to determine a fixed point where the X, Y, and Z axes become tangent. This value does not change after calibration.

1 2 3 4 5

Part Zero Workpiece Machine Zero X Axis Y Axis

Figure 41. Part Zero Relative to Machine Zero Viewed Looking Down at Table

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-3

Program the axes to move within the coordinate system as shown below:

-X +X -Y +Y -Z +Z

Table moves to the left Table moves to the right Table moves toward the operator Table moves away from the operator Spindle moves down and into the part Spindle moves up and away from the part

Figure 42. Axis Motion

The location of part zero in Z is established during tool calibration. During setup, the tool zero calibration plane is established for each tool. The program dimensions for a part are relative to these points, viewed facing the machine, as shown below:

1 2 3 4

Table Part (workpiece) Machine Absolute - Z Axis Tool Zero Calibration Plane

Figure 43. Part Zero in Z (Tool Zero Calibration Plane)

Select the Toggle Units softkey to change between inch and metric units of measurement.

4 - 4 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Part Setup Coordinate Systems

Machine Coordinate System
The Machine Coordinate System is fixed to the machine frame and does not move when the machine axes move. This coordinate system is located at the spindle nose center when all machine axes are at their zero positions.

Unrotated Coordinate System

The Unrotated Part Coordinate System is present on a 4-axis or 5-axis machine and is located at the Workpiece Coordinate system when all the machines axes are at their Part Setup Zero locations. This coordinate system moves with the machines linear axes, but does not rotate with the rotary axes. The Unrotated Coordinate system is generally used only by NC Post Processors that do not use Tool Center Point Management.

Workpiece Coordinate System

The Workpiece Coordinate System is fixed to the physical workpiece fixtured to the table; it moves and rotates when the machine axes move.The coordinate system is fixed to the part fixtured on the machining centers table. The Workpiece Coordinate System is typically set in the users CAD/CAM system or on the part drawing used for programming the tool paths.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-5

The Machine Coordinate, Workpiece Coordinate, and Unrotated Coordinate systems are shown in the figure below:

1 2 3

Machine Coordinate System Unrotated Part Coordinate System Workpiece Coordinate System

Figure 44. Part Setup Coordinate Systems

4 - 6 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

5-Axis Part Setup Fields

Follow this link to the Hurco website to view a 5-Axis Part Setup video demonstration: Video Demonstrations at www.hurco.com Scroll to the bottom of the page and select the video to download. Internet connection is required.

The Part Setup screen for a 5-axis machine contains these fields: Z Table Offsetdirectional distance from the C-axis table to the X-Y plane of the Workpiece Coordinate System, on page 4 - 5. Z Table Offset is positive in the part setup shown in the figure below. Offset Zdirectional distance from Zero Calibration (described below) to the X-Y plane of the Workpiece Coordinate System, on page 4 - 5. Offset Z is positive in the part setup shown in the figure below. Zero Calibration, the tool calibration height, is also used to set up a part on a 5-axis machine. Zero Calibration is defined on the Tool Setup screen. Zero Calibration is positive in the part setup shown in the figure below; however, in the NC Tool Offsets table it is negative. Ensure that the B-axis angle is at zero degree when measuring Z Table Offset, Offset Z, and Zero Calibration fields for 5-axis machining. For conversational programs, B-axis Part Setup Offset must be zero degree.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-7

1 2 3 4

Workpiece Coordinate System Zero Calibration (positive value) Offset Z (positive value) Z Table Offset (positive value)

Figure 45. 5-Axis Part Setup

4 - 8 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Part Setup Fields

Depending on machine configuration, the Part Setup screen contains the following fields: Part Zero X / Y defines the X and Y locations in machine coordinates for part zero. Part Zero Z (Absolute Tool Length Mode)defines the distance from Machine Zero to the workpiece Z0 of the part. This field defaults to zero for all new programs. See Absolute Tool Length mode, on page 4 - 17 for more information. Touch the top of workpiece with the tip of a calibrated tool and select the Calculate Part Z with Current Tool softkey. The value is automatically entered into the field as the distance from the touch-off gauge block to the workpiece. To add an offset, add or subtract a value from the Part Zero Z value. If this field is not set before running a part program, tools will plunge to the gauge block height. Part Zero A / B /Cdefines the A, B, C locations of Rotary coordinates for part zero. Disable Centerlines (rotary configurations only)disables the use of rotary axis centerline data. When set to Yes, the centerline fields (below) are not available. Default is No. A /B /C Centerline X / Y / Zdefines incremental distances from true part zero. Program these values in order to draw the program properly on the Graphics screen. For rotary programs, Hurco recommends automatically calculating the rotary centerline. See Rotary Part Setup in the Options manual for more information. Part Zero Z Shift (Absolute Tool Length mode)defines a global offset to Part Zero value in Z. Offset Z (Zero Calibration Mode)defines an offset dimension relative to the tools Zero Calibration value. This field defaults to 0 so that the tool tip of all calibrated tools will be at the same Z=0 in the program. Offset Z is combined with all of the programs tool calibration points and the Z Top and Z Bottom of the Safety Work Region. To use Store Position softkey or button, calibrated tool previously defined in Tool Setup for this program must be in the spindle. Entering a value in the Offset Z field adds or subtracts the amount of the offset to/from the Tool Calibration value. For example, you can adjust all Tool Calibration values in the Z axis and Z Start to compensate for part thickness by changing the Offset Z value without recalibrating each tool. The Include Offset Z in Tool Zero Cal parameter indicates if Offset Z is added to the Zero Calibration value when tool calibration is set using Store Machine Position. See General Parameters 2, on page 4 - 44 for more information.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-9

1 2 3 4

Table Workpiece Reference gauge block Offset Z (Zero Calibration) Part Zero Z (Absolute Tool Length)

Figure 46. Offset Z or Part Zero Z

Safety Work Regiondefines a part-relative safety area to prevent the cutting tool from colliding with fixtures or other equipment. The Safety Work Region created in Part Setup is saved with a conversational part program; the Safety Work Region is not saved with NC programs. Use the Safety Work Region fields on the Part Setup screen to enter values to define the safety region. Type the value in the field, or jog each axis to the desired safety region, and press the Store Position button on the jog unit. Out of range entries in the Safety Work Region appear in red. See Machine Specifications for ranges. Always enter the Z(-) parameter (Z Bottom) to prevent the tool from drilling through the part and into the table. Use the Z(+) field (Z Top) to define the clearance above the part and fixture. Use the Z(+) field with a Position block. The Z Top value reduces rapid Z motion for Position blocks. The spindle retracts to the Z Top value above the tool zero calibration for Position blocks.

4 - 10 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

The figure below translates these fields into the Safety Work Region:

Part Zero

Figure 47. Safety Work Region

Z Table Offset (Zero Calibration Mode)specifies the part offset in Z direction relative to the table top. X/Y Skew (Deg)represents, in degrees, how far the part is from perfect alignment with the table. Zone (dual-zone machining)specifies the zone for dual-zone machines. 1 = Zone 1 (the left-side zone when facing the machine). 2 = Zone 2 (the right-side zone when facing the machine). 0 = the current zone. Zone 0 can be used when dual zones are enabled but you do not need to run the program in a particular zone. Setting the Zone field to 0 will run the program in the zone that the spindle currently occupies.

Digital Read Out (DRO)

The DRO is displayed at the top of the Part Setup screen (it also appears at the top of the Tool Setup and Manual Mode screens). The DRO shows the real-time position of the axes and machine status. The current zone is displayed for dual-zone machines. The Machine and Part position information in the DRO will not appear if the machine is not calibrated. These are the DRO fields (fields are dependant on the machine mode displayed): Zone (dual-zone machines only)displays the current zone. Machine and Part Axesdisplays the current position of all axes. Opt Stop On (Off)displays the status (on or off) of the Optional Stop for NC programs. Orientationthe orientation of the axes. Chip Removaldisplays the status of the chip auger. Tool in Spindledisplays the tool number of the tool in the spindle. Spindledisplays the current spindle speed. Feeddisplays the current feed rate. Program Run Timedisplays the time the program has been running.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-11

F(%)displays the current Feedrate per Minute percentage set on the axis Feed Rate knob. R(%)displays the current Rapid Traverse Feedrate percentage set on the Rapid override knob. S(%)displays the current spindle RPM percentage set on the Spindle Speed override knob. Magazineindicates the current pocket. Axes Statusshows the axes status (calibrated or uncalibrated). Axis Limit Switchesdisplays the status of the machines limit switches as each axis calibrates.

To access the configurable DRO view, select the Auxiliary button, and choose the Launch DRO softkey.

Part Setup Softkeys

Part Setup contains these softkeys: Work OffsetsAccesses the work coordinates G54-G59 and a set of shift values for NC programs. These are used to set multiple part zeroes for multiple parts fixtured to the table and milled consecutively using the same program. Tool SetupAccesses Tool Setup screen to enter the descriptions of tools that will be used in the part program. Part ProgrammingAccesses fields to enter the exact description of how the part will be cut. See Part Programming in the Conversational Programming manual for more information. Program ParametersAccesses the Program Parameters screen to specify data common to all program data blocks. Part ProbingAccesses the Probing parameters screen (available only with the Probing option). Store Machine PositionSets the current axis position as a Part Zero location. The cursor location determines which axis (X or Y) will be set.

These are the softkeys on the second Part Setup screen, accessed with the More softkey: Stock GeometryAccesses fields to specify the dimensions of the stock material so it displays properly in graphics. Calculate Rotary OffsetsCalculates centerline offsets for rotary programs. Orient SpindleAllows the spindle to be positioned for tool insertion or removal. Toggle UnitsChanges units from metric to imperial and vice versa.

4 - 12 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Part Fixturing and Tool Loading

Before entering data into the part and tool setup screens for a part program, first fixture the work piece to the table and load a tool into the spindle. In order to determine the starting point (part zero) in the part, first fixture the work piece (raw material or stock) to the machine tool table. This process, called fixturing, can be accomplished using a variety of clamping devices, such as vises and toe clamps. Select the fixturing device that will hold the work piece securely without getting in the way of the cutting tool while the part is being made. You may want to insert a tool in the spindle to use as an edge finder when identifying part zero. Press the Manual button in the Machine Mode grouping to display the Manual screen. Use the Tool in Spindle field and softkey to enter the tool number for the edge finder tool. Insert this tool as described in Loading a Tool into the Spindle, on page 1 - 30. The tool will need to be calibrated as described in Tool Setup, on page 4 - 21.

Work Offsets
When in NC mode, the Work Offsets softkey displays up to six work coordinates (G54G59) and a set of shift offset values. These are used to set multiple part zeroes for multiple parts fixtured to the table and milled consecutively using the same program. The X, Y, Z, and optional Rotary A and B work offset values can be entered for G54 to G59 codes. The coordinates defining G54 are the part zero coordinates for the original part defined on the Part Setup screen. When the G54 coordinates are changed on this screen, the part setup is also changed. These work offsets are stored in memory, but not with the part program. They are not saved to a disk file and need to be re-entered. The shift offset coordinates, which follow the six work coordinates on the screen, move all of the part zero coordinates as a group. This incremental value is useful when you place part fixtures on the table in a different location and want to shift all of the work offsets to the newly fixtured location. The G54-G59 offset values do not change on the screen when shift offset values are entered.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-13

For dual-zone machines, specify the zone for each offset:

Set zone for each work offset

Figure 48. Work Offsets on a dual-zone machine

Values for the Zone field are: 0zone undefined (the active zone when only one is in use) 1Zone 1 2Zone 2

Auxiliary Work Offsets

There are 93 additional X, Y, Z, and optional Rotary A and B work offsets available on the AUX WORK OFFSETS screen. These are accessed with the Aux Work Offsets F6 softkey on the WORK OFFSETS screen. To access any of these offsets call G code G54.1 Pn, where n is 1 thru 93. For example, to change to auxiliary work offset 46 you would call G54.1 P46 in your NC program. To update work offset values, use data setting G code G10 L20 Pn to set the Auxiliary work offsets values. For example, to update work offset 46 value call G10 L20 P46 X12.5 Y3.0 Z-0.5 Following is a sample NC program that uses Auxiliary Work Offsets: % G90G80 T1M6F100 G10 L20 P1 X1 Y1 Z.-1 G10 L20 P93 X10 Y10 Z-.1 G54.1 P1 (change work part setup to 1) G1X0.Y0.Z0. X1.

4 - 14 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Y1. X0. Y0. G54.1 P93 (change work part setup to 93) G1X0.Y0.Z0. X1. Y1. X0. Y0. M02

Stock Geometry
STOCK GEOMETRY F1 allows you to specify the dimensions of the stock material so it displays properly in graphics (when Stock Outline field is enabled in Graphics Settings). For dual-zone machines, choose Zone 1 or Zone 2 tab to specify stock geometry settings. Fields are: Manual Stock Sizingspecify if you will manually set the stock dimensions. When set to No, the software automatically sizes and positions the stock. To calculate this, WinMax takes the diameter of the largest tool in the program and adds 7/10ths of that size to the stock diameter X and Y fields (with a minimum addition of .05). When this field is set to Yes, you must enter the dimensions manually: Stock Typespecify Box or Cylinder: Boxenables settings for X length, Y length, Z length of stock box or cube. Cylinderenables direction, length, and radius of cylinder.

Zero Refcoordinate system zero from which to reference the stock zero position. X Ref Positionlocate the stock on X axis relative to the ZERO REF; can use Store Position or can be set to Part Zero with softkey. Y Ref Positionlocate the stock on Y axis relative to the ZERO REF; can use Store Position or can be set to Part Zero with softkey. Z Ref Positionlocate the stock on Z axis relative to the ZERO REF; can use Store Position or can be set to Part Zero with softkey. X/Y/Z Length (available when Stock Type is Box)specify lengths. Direction (available when Stock Type is Cylinder)specify POS X, NEG X, POS Y, NEG Y, POS Z, or NEG Z. Length (available when Stock Type is Cylinder)specify length along axis from reference position. Radius (available when Stock Type is Cylinder)specify stock radius.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-15

Manual Border Sizingspecify if you will manually size the border (available only when Manual Stock Sizing is set to NO). Border Sizespecify stock border dimension (available only when Manual Border Sizing is set to YES).

Apply Border To Top (available when Manual Stock Sizing is set to NO) applies the automatically-calculated border to the top of the stock. The border is automatically applied to the bottom.

4 - 16 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Tool Calibration Modes

Tool measurement and Part Setup Z measurements can be set with one of two modes: Zero Calibration or Absolute Tool Length. The mode is selected in Utilities/User Preferences/Tool Utilities and Settings. See Tool Utilities and Settings, on page 3 - 8. If a programs tools were calibrated using one mode, and that program is loaded into a control that is set to the other mode, a message is displayed that the programs tool calibrations cannot be used. The program data is loaded, but the tool calibration data is not; tool calibration fields are set to zero.

Absolute Tool Length mode

With the Absolute Tool Length method, the absolute length of the tool from the spindle nose to the tip of the tool is stored in Tool Setup. Each tool used in a program should be calibrated to the same gauge device set on table top. To use Absolute Tool Length Mode: 1. In the Tool Setup screen, enter the number of the tool to be calibrated into the Tool Number field. 2. If the tool is in spindle, jog Z down to the gauge block. 3. Select Store Machine Position softkey or button on the Jog Unit. 4. Part Zero is stored separately in the Part Zero Z field in Part Setup and is the distance from Machine Zero to the Z0 of the workpiece: a. Select Part Setup softkey. b. In Part Zero Z field, use calibrated tool to touch off Z0 of the workpiece and select the Store Machine Position softkey or button on the jog unit.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-17

Setup of Gauge Device

To use Absolute Tool Length mode, you must define the Z location for the table top and the touch off device(s). This needs to be done only once unless the touch off device changes. Access the Tool Measurement screen with the Tool Measurement Settings softkey on the 2nd set of Tool Setup softkeys (use the More softkey):

Figure 49. Tool Measurement screen

Tool Measurement fields are: Touch-Off Deviceidentifies the device to be used. The control allows up to six devices. Devicedefines the tool setter method: gauge block or tool probe, if equipped. Heightspecifies the height of gauge or probe relative to the Z Reference. Z Location calculates the difference between Z Reference and the height of the device. Notesenter a description of the device specified. Z Referencedefines the machine reference position of the table top from machine zero.

To set the Z Reference position: 1. Advance to Z Reference field. 2. Place a gauge of known length on table top. 3. Jog Z-axis down and carefully touch spindle nose to top of gauge block. 4. Select Store Machine Position softkey or press the store position button on remote jog unit. The Part Kinematics Z Reference value from Rotary Axes Parameters may also be used as the Z Reference value by selecting the Set to Part Kinematics Ref softkey.
4 - 18 Programming Basics 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

5. Subtract the length of the gauge block from the value stored in Z Reference field. With Z Reference field highlighted, you can type in length of the gauge block followed by enter. For example, if Z Reference measures -562.259, using a 200 length gauge, type 200- and enter to set Z Reference to -762.259. Once Z Reference is set it does not have to be changed or set again, even if new devices are used. This field and the calculated Z Location fields should not be edited. To set up a gauge device: 1. In the Touch-Off Device field, select the device number to be used when measuring tool length. Up to six different devices can be set, but only the one currently selected in the Touch-Off Device field is active when setting tool length. 2. Advance to the row number that corresponds to the touch-off device number. 3. In the Device column, select gauge. 4. In the Height column, enter the height of the gauge. Z Location field will be automatically calculated by adding the height to the Z Reference value. Do not edit Z Location column. 5. Multiple gauges can be set up by specifying height in the appropriate row (16). However, the active device for measuring tool length is the one specified in the Touch-Off Device field. All values set in Tool Measurement Settings are retained in the control and are applicable to all programs. They are not program specific. To set up a probe device: 1. Follow the steps to set up a single gauge device (for example, set up gauge for device) and set touch-off device to Device 1. 2. In Tool Setup, use any tool to touch-off on the Device 1 gauge. 3. Select Store Machine Position softkey or Store Position button on jog unit. 4. In Tool Measurement Screen, select the touch-off device to be used when probing tool length. 5. In the appropriate row, select Probe as the device from the drop-down Device list. 6. Jog the tool down to the probe until probe is engaged. 7. With cursor in the Z Location column, select Store Position button on jog unit or Store Z Location softkey. This will calculate the height of the probe from Z Reference. Also see Tool Probing in Options for more information.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-19

Zero Calibration Mode

With the Zero Calibration method of tool measurement, tools are calibrated to a plane in the Z-axis as referenced from the Z Home position. Each tool used in a program should be calibrated to the same plane. To use Zero Calibration mode: 1. In the Tool Setup screen, enter the number of the tool to be calibrated into the Tool Number field. 2. If the tool is in spindle, jog Z down to the reference plane or gauge block. 3. Select Store Machine Position softkey or button on the Jog Unit. All tools should be calibrated to the same reference plane. 4. If the reference plane is not the same as Z=Part Zero for program depth: a. Select Part Setup softkey. b. In Offset Z field, enter distance from reference plane to Part Zero, or use calibrated tool to touch off Z=0 plane and select the Store Machine Position softkey or button on the Remote Jog Unit. If the plane that all tools are touched off of is the top of the workpiece, all program dimensions for Z will be from Z=0. If the plane is not the top of the workpiece (as when a gauge block is used), the operator can use the Offset Z field in Part Setup to set the distance from the gauge block or other plane to the top of the workpiece plane. See Part Setup, on page 4 - 3 for more information.

4 - 20 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Tool Setup
Use the Tool Setup screen to describe the tools that will be used for the part program. You can access this screen from either the Input screen or the Part Setup screen by selecting the Tool Setup softkey. To review all tools currently programmed, go to the Tool Review screen. When running a previously created part program, Tool Setup must be carefully checked to be certain the tools described for the old program match the tools planned for the new program. If a tool breaks or is not available when running a previously created part program, the Tool Setup information must be changed. See also: Tool Setup Fields, on page 4 - 21 and Tool Setup Softkeys, on page 4 - 25

Tool Setup Fields

The DRO is displayed at the top of the Tool Setup screen. See Digital Read Out (DRO), on page 4 - 11 for more information. The Tool Setup fields are defined as follows (note that not all fields appear on the screen for all tools): Tool NumberIdentifies the number of the programmed tool. For a new program, enter a new number in the Tool Number field and move to another field to display Tool Setup fields. After at least one tool has been programmed, can add another tool: Enter new tool in Tool Number field. Use right arrow to create next available numeric tool number.

The range of possible tool numbers is 1 through 9999 and is set in the Tool Changer Specifications function in the Machine Specifications screen in Utilities. The Next Tool and Previous Tool softkeys become available when more than one tool has been programmed. Use these softkeys as appropriate to access tool setup screens within a program. Tool numbers do not necessarily correspond exactly to tool pot numbers on the magazine of your ATC.

LocationIdentifies the physical location of the tool: Spindletool is in spindle Manualtool is defined Autotool is in ATC magazine Pockdisplays the tool pocket location of the tool

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-21

Tool TypeIdentifies the type of tool. Use the appropriate softkey or dropdown list to select a tool type. If you do not see the type of tool that you wish to use, select the More softkey to display more Type softkeys. The tool types are: Standard Tools
Drill Tap Boring Head End Mill Face Mill Ball End Mill Back Spotface Drill Probe Gun Drill Center Drill Chamfer Mill Bull Nose Mill

WinMax-Only Tools
Ream Spot Drill Forming Tap Counter Bore Counter Sink Keyseat Mill Thread Mill (SC) Thread Mill (MC) Corner Round Mill Dove Tail Mill Engraving Mill Taper Radius End Mill Custom Tool

DiameterIdentifies the nominal diameter of the tool's cutting surface (i.e., the diameter before the tool suffers from normal wear). The diameter range is 0 through 99.9999 inches/2539.997 mm. The Diameter also appears on the Tool Geometry screen. The programmed diameter is used to automatically determine cutter compensation during milling operations. The system calculates the radius of the cutting tool and automatically allows for this distance when performing milling operations. This means it is not necessary to remember the size of the cutting tool or manually calculate tool offsets when programming the part.

Zero Calibration (Zero Calibration Mode)identifies Z-axis position of the tool tip when positioned at workpiece or gauge block. A (P) is displayed if the value is set by probing. See Zero Calibration Mode, on page 4 - 20 for more information. Tool Cal Length (Absolute Tool Length mode)identifies the length of the tool from the spindle nose to the tip of the tool. See Absolute Tool Length mode, on page 4 - 17 for more information. Touch-Off Device (Absolute Tool Length mode)displays the touch off device and type (gauge or probe) specified on the Tool Measurement screen. Displayed for reference only; edited on the Tool Measurement screen. Shank DiameterAppears when the tool type is Back Spotface and represents the diameter of the tool shank.
704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

4 - 22 Programming Basics

Thread DiameterAppears when the tool type is Tap. Select the Tap icon, located to the right of the field. Choose the appropriate diameter from the pop-up box, as shown below:

Use the slider to select range

Select desired diameter

Touch to select

TPI (or PITCH)Appears when the tool type is Tap or Thread Mill (MC). Threads per Inch (TPI) appears when the programs unit of measurement is inch. Pitch appears when millimeter is the selected unit of measurement. The range is 0.0 through 1000.00 inches for TPI (0.0 to 2514.6 mm for Pitch). If you enter a value for TPI, WinMax automatically calculates the Pitch. If you enter a value for Pitch, WinMax calculates TPI. CAL appears next to the calculated value.

Speed (RPM)Define the correct speed to be used for this tool, if known. This value will be copied into each new data block in the part program that uses this tool. If necessary, this parameter can be changed within the new data block when programming the part. The system uses the Speed (RPM) value to automatically calculate spindle speeds for the tool. You can manually change feed and speed values calculated by the control. The range is set in Machine Specifications, on page 3 - 2 in Utilities.

CoolantDefine the coolant, if any, to be used for the tool. Coolant is programmable on a tool-by-tool basis. The softkey and drop-down list choices change to Off, Primary, Secondary, or Both when the cursor is at the Coolant field. Select Primary for machines equipped with a coolant system, Secondary for machines equipped with a secondary coolant system (i.e. through spindle coolant), and Both for machines with two coolant systems.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-23

Surface Speed (FPM)Use for milling tools (drill, end mill, face mill, or ball nosed end mill). The Surface Speed, Flutes, and Feed/Flute fields appear. Enter a Surface Speed in feet per minute (or millimeters per minute), and the Flutes and Feed/Flute fields appear. Enter values that indicate the number of the flutes (teeth) on the tool and the feedrate per flute. The system uses the values entered in Surface Speed, Flutes, and Feed/Flute to automatically calculate the feeds and speeds for the tool. You can manually change all feed and speed values calculated by the control.

FlutesEnter the number of cutting flutes for the tool. This entry will be used to automatically calculate the Mill Feed in all data blocks for this part program using this tool. You can manually change all feed and speed values calculated by the control .

FeedDisplays the default Mill Feed or Plunge Feed (depending on the tool type). This value is calculated by the control, based on diameter, feed/flute, and number of flutes for milling tools, or diameter and feed per revolution for hole-making tools. The value can also be entered directly into the field. Feed/Flute (Tooth)Enter the tool's chipload. This entry will be used to automatically calculate the Mill Feed in all data blocks for this part program using this tool. You can manually change all feed and speed values calculated by the control.

Cutting Timedisplays the number of minutes a tool has been running in the spindle (seconds are rounded up to the nearest minute). Starts at zero unless a time is pre-set by the user (if there is already time on the tool). When Tool Life Monitoring is enabled (in Tool Utilities and Settings) a second field is also displayed, where the maximum cutting time for the tool can be specified. See Tool Utilities and Settings, on page 3 - 8 for more information. Diameter Wearenter a number to compensate for tool wear. Diameter Wear = (program tool diameter) - (actual tool diameter) For example, to adjust a 0.5 inch diameter tool for .001 inch of wear, enter .001 in the Diameter Wear field to set cutter comp diameter to 0.499 inches. Compensate for tool wear in this field rather than the Tool Diameter field. This will maintain the tool diameter and ensure accurate tool matching with other part programs that use the same tool. The Diameter Wear value alters the toolpath for cutter compensation. For example, when milling a circle with Milling Type set to Outside, a positive number in the Diameter Wear field will result in a smaller diameter cut, and a negative number will result in a larger diameter cut. If a probe is used to determine diameter, the Diameter Wear field will contain the compensated value based on the probed diameter. A (P) appears next to the Diameter Wear field to indicate that the value was derived from the probed diameter.

4 - 24 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Tool Setup Softkeys

The Tool Setup Softkeys are as follows: Delete ToolDeletes all program settings for the tool number entered in the Tool Field, for a Manual tool. If the tool is in Spindle or Auto, this softkey is not active. Part SetupAccesses Part Setup screen. See Part Setup, on page 4 - 3 for more information. Part ProgrammingAccesses fields to enter the exact description of how the part will be cut. See Part Programming in the Conversational Programming manual for more information. Tool OffsetsAvailable only for NC programs. The tool length offsets appear on the screen. Tool offsets are tool lengths used to compensate tool length without altering the NC program. Tool offsets are not saved with the NC program. Use the Positive Tool Length Compensation (G43) or Negative Tool Length Compensation (G44) codes. A G49 code specifies tool offset cancel. An H00 also cancels an offset. The G43 and G44 codes set a mode of operation within the program that is in effect until a G49 or H00 is used. If an H code is used without a G43 or G44, in effect, the value stored in the tool length offset table is used as the calibrated tool length. If a zero is entered for the Tool Offset value (Tool Offset H Table), the control uses the Tool Offset value entered in Tool Setup for the tool length. If a value greater than zero is entered for the Tool Offset value (Tool Offset H table), the control replaces the value set in Tool Setup with the Tool Offset H Table value. The four keyboard arrows, Page Up, and Page Down keys scroll through the 01 to 200 offsets. When the Store Machine Position softkey is pressed, a negative Z value reflecting the Z axis machine position is entered on the screen.

Tool HomeAllows you to move the tool quickly away from the part. Using this softkey after Tool Calibration is much faster than pressing the axis jog buttons on the jog unit. Press this softkey and then press the Start Cycle button to move the spindle to the change height. Set Tool Zero (Zero Calibration mode)stores the Z-axis position of the tool tip when at workpiece or gauge block plane. To use this softkey, carefully jog the tool in the spindle down to the top of the part or to the fixture defined at the Tool Calibration point and then press the softkey. The system stores the position of the tool into the current part program and the number appears in the Zero Calibration field on the Tool Setup screen. This can also be accomplished by pressing the Store Position button on the jog unit. On the screen the part display for Z changes to zero. In Zero Calibration mode, all tools used in a part program will need to be calibrated to the same plane.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-25

A warning message is displayed if the edited tool is not the tool in spindle. Select OK to store the current position for the tool that is being edited. Select Cancel if you do not want to set tool zero for that tool. Set Length Using Touch-Off Device (Absolute Tool Length mode) stores the tool length when using a gauge or other touch-off device. For a gauge, carefully jog the tool in the spindle down to the top of the gauge and select the softkey. The system stores the tool length in the Tool Cal Length field. This softkey is active when the following is true: 1. The Tool Probe Parameters Type field is set to No Tool Probe. This field is accessed in Tool Setup: a. Select the More softkey. b. Select the Tool Probing softkey. c. Select the Tool Probe Setup softkey. 2. The Part Probe Parameters Present field is set to Yes. This field is accessed in Part Setup: a. Select the Part Probing softkey. b. Select the Part Probe Parameters softkey. Set Tool Zero Using Gauge Block (Zero Calibration mode; Probing only)stores the Z-axis position of the tool tip when using a gauge block into the Zero Calibration field and marks the tool as probed so it can be used in Part Probing. To use this softkey, carefully jog the tool in the spindle down to the top of the gauge at the Tool Calibration plane and press the softkey. This softkey is active when the following is true: 1. The Tool Probe Parameters Type field is set to No Tool Probe. This field is accessed in Tool Setup: a. Select the More softkey. b. Select the Tool Probing softkey. c. Select the Tool Probe Setup softkey. 2. The Part Probe Parameters Present field is set to Yes. This field is accessed in Part Setup: a. Select the Part Probing softkey. b. Select the Part Probe Parameters softkey. More accesses second set of Tool Setup softkeys. Exitexits the tool setup process and allows return to the Input screen.

4 - 26 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Second set of Tool Setup softkeys: Advanced Tool Settingsset Tool Geometry, Feed and Speed, Surface Finish Quality, and other tool information. Change Tool NumberAllows you to change the tool number for the current tool displayed. See Change Tool Number, on page 4 - 34 for more information. Tool ProbingAccesses the Probing Parameters, on page 4 - 51. Probing is available only with BMCs. Program ParametersAccesses the program parameters. Part Program Tool ReviewAccesses the tool review screen. Tool Measurement Settings (Absolute Tool Length mode)accesses the Tool Measurement screen where touch-off device height is set. More Access first set of Tool Setup Softkeys. ExitExits the tool setup process and allows return to the Input screen.

Advanced Tool Settings

Tool Geometry, on page 4 - 28 Feed and Speed, on page 4 - 30 NC SFQ, on page 4 - 32 Supplier, on page 4 - 33 Notes, on page 4 - 33 Edit Apt Parameters, on page 4 - 33 Basic tool information is stored in Tool Setup and additional information can be set in the Advanced Tool Settings screens. Tool Geometry, Feed and Speed information, SFQ, and other tool information are set in the Advanced Tool Settings screen. Advanced Tool Settings are optional; it is not necessary to adjust these settings in order to run part programs. They are available to simplify programming and increase program efficiency.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-27

Tool Geometry
Tool dimensions are set in the Geometry tab. Fields denoted with a * are required in order to draw a tool in Solid Graphics; however, these fields are automatically populated with information from Tool Setup, as ratio of entered diameter. A picture of the tool is displayed, and when a field is selected, that area on the picture is denoted.

Tool length field is selected and corresponding area is denoted on picture

Figure 410. Tool Geometry

Most fields on the Geometry screen correspond to tool type, see the table on the following page for information about these fields. Additional Geometry fields are: DIRECTIONspindle direction COLORthe color of the path left by the tool in Solid Graphics. The default selection is Sequential, where tools are represented in the following order by color: Yellow1st tool Orange2nd tool Violet3rd tool Green4th tool Gray5th tool Blue6th tool Cyan7th tool Magenta8th tool Tan9th tool Lime10th tool

Alternatively, a specific color can be assigned to a specific tool by changing the selection in the field.

4 - 28 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

The following table provides the tool-type specific fields:

Thread Diameter Threads per inch Shank Diameter Neck Diameter X X X Chamfer Angle Ream Chamfer X X X X X X X X X X X X

Cutting Edges

Length of Cut

Stylus length

Drill Tap (cutting) Boring head End Mill Face Mill Ball End Mill Back Spotface Probe Gun Drill Center Drill Chamfer Mill Bull Nose Mill Ream Spot Drill Forming Tap Counter Bore Counter Sink Keyseat Mill Thread Mill Single Cutter (SC) Thread Mill Multi Cutter (MC) Taper Radius End Mill Corner Round Mill Dove Tail Mill Engraving Mill

X X

X X X x x

X X X X

X X x X X X X X X X X X

X x x X X X X X X X X X X

X x

X X X

X X

X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X

X X

X X X

X X

X X X

X X X X

X X X X

X X

X X X X X X X

X X X

X X X X

X X X

X X

X X

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-29

Tip Diameter X X

Tool Length

Tip Length

Drill Angle

Drill Angle

Tip Angle

Diameter

Radius

Flutes

Angle

Tip diameter is used to calculate Milling Type offset for Chamfer Mill, Corner Round Mill, and Taper Radius End Mill. When Shank Diameter, Length of Cut, and Tool Length are set as a ratio of the diameter, values will be automatically recalculated if the diameter changes or until a user-defined value is entered. When used in a Thread Milling cycle, the Length of Cut and Pitch are used to calculate the number of passes in the cycle.

Feed and Speed

Feed and Speed in Advanced Tool Settings is available only with the Tool and Material Library option. Feed and Speed settings are carried over from Tool Setup or can be specified in the Feed and Speed tab for specific tool and material combinations in a part program. Choose one of the materials from the work material list for a specific tool and enter the feeds and speeds for both roughing and finishing for that tool and work material combination. This information is saved in the Tool and Material Library and can be utilized in future part programs without re-entering the speeds and feeds: When the Program Parameters for a part program specify a work material, the tool number will recall the feed and speed for that material. Regardless of the material set in the Feed and Speed tab, the main Tool Setup screen will always display feeds and speeds for Unspecified material.

Specify work material

Specify Roughing & Finishing

Speed and Feed are calculated or can be specified in these fields

Figure 411. Advanced Tool Settings: Feed and Speed

Roughing and finishing tool parameters can be specified. Fields are: SURFACE SPEEDset in Tool Setup, or calculated from speed and diameter CHIPLOADset in Tool Setup, or calculated based on feeds and flutes MAX DEPTHset maximum depth of cut (optional)
704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

4 - 30 Programming Basics

COOLANTselect coolant type: none, primary, secondary, or both SPEEDcalculated value or may be user-defined FEEDcalculated value or may be user-defined PECK DEPTHset peck depth PLUNGE FEEDset plunge feed, or calculated based on Feed Per Rev for hole-making tools. Feed Per Rev is used for hole-making tools instead of chipload, independent of the number of flutes.

Feed and Speed Calculations

The WinMax software automatically performs tool feed and speed calculations for each tool programmed in Tool Setup, on page 4 - 21. The calculations are carried over to each data block in the part program using the programmed tool. The software uses data to perform the calculations from these Tool Setup fields: Diameter, Speed (RPM), Surface Speed (FPM) or (MPM), Flutes, and Feed/Flute (Tooth). Feeds and speeds are related using the following formulas: Speed Formulas, on page 4 31 and Feed Formulas, on page 4 - 32. Calculated values are carried forward to the Mill Feed field and Speed (RPM) field for milling and holes data blocks. You can override automatically calculated values in a data block by inserting a user defined value. If you manually change a calculated value in Tool Setup, you will be prompted to update feeds and speeds for the part program data blocks. For fields that display truncated decimal point values, you may view the non-truncated value by pressing and holding the CTRL key and pressing the period (.) key.

Speed Formulas
The WinMax software uses these formulas to automatically calculate the spindle speeds: Metric Mode: Surface Speed x 100

English Units:

If the calculated RPM exceeds the maximum spindle RPM entered in Machine Specifications, the value appears in red font color.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-31

If you enter the Surface Speed (fpm) value, the Speed (RPM) value will be calculated for you. If you enter the Speed (RPM) value, the Surface Speed (fpm) value will be calculated for you. In some cases, calculation rounding may slightly alter a calculated value. For example, if you enter a value of 7000 RPM for the Speed field in Tool Setup for a Drill operation, the calculated value for Surface Speed is 458 fpm. However, if you enter a Surface Speed of 458 fpm in the Surface Speed field, the calculated value for Speed is 6997 RPM.

Feed Formulas
For Milling data blocks, specify the number of flutes for the tool in the Flutes field. The software uses the following formula to calculate the Mill Feed:

For Holes operations, flutes are not specified for the tool. The software uses this formula to calculate the Mill Feed:

If the calculated feedrate exceeds the maximum contouring feedrate for the machine, an error is generated during the program run.

NC SFQ
NC SFQ in Advanced Tool Settings is available only with the NC/ Conversational Merge option. Surface finish quality in NC programming is set in the NC SFQ tab of Advanced Tool Settings. Change Enable Tool SFQ to YES and adjust the Tool SFQ. This automatically sets the SFQ value whenever the tool is used in NC programming and will override the SFQ value set in Program Parameters or with the G05.3 setting.

4 - 32 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Supplier
Supplier in Advanced Tool Settings is available only with the Tool and Material Library option. The Supplier tab is optionally used to store information about tool supplier and orders in memo-type fields.

Notes
Notes in Advanced Tool Settings is available only with the Tool and Material Library option. The Notes tab is used to store notes and miscellaneous information about a tool in a memo-type field.

Edit Apt Parameters

The Edit Apt Parameters fields are defined as follows: Tooldisplays the tool number and type entered on the Tool Setup screen. This field cannot be edited. To change tools, go to Tool Setup, on page 4 - 21. NC Gear Rangedefine the spindle gear range. 0 = Low; 9 = High. NC Tool Numberindicate the starting tool in the tool changer. The range is 0 to 999. NC Diameter Offsetindicate the tool diameter to be used for cutter compensation. This field is used for posting only. This will not affect a file that is saved as an ISNC file. If Cutter Comp is selected from the Output Tool Path As field on the Post Processor Configuration screen, the value in the NC Diameter Offset field will be put into the APT file. This value will refer to the tool diameter offset on the target machine. If Centerline is selected from the Output Tool Path As field, then the value entered in the NC Diameter Offset field will not affect the APT file. NC Length Offsetindicate the length offset at the machine tool.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-33

Change Tool Number

The Change Tool Number softkey allows you to change the number of an existing tool or copy an existing tool and give it a different number while retaining the tool with the same number. To change the Tool Number or create a copy of a tool, display the tool in the Tool Setup screen. With the cursor in the Tool Number field, select the More softkey to display the next softkey menu. Select the Change Tool Number softkey. The Current Tool Description and New Tool Number fields are displayed. Type the new number into the New Tool Number field and select one of the following softkeys: Change Tool Numberchanges the number of the tool to the new Tool Number. The old tool number is simply changed to the new number. If the new tool number is already assigned to another tool, then the tool numbers are swapped. If the Tool Library option is enabled, the tool number is also updated in the spindle or ATC. Copy Tooladds a new tool that is identical to the Current Tool Description. If the New Tool Number is not in the current program or Tool & Material Library, the current tool is copied to the New Tool Number. If the New Tool Number is already used in the current program or Tool & Material Library, a prompt appears that the New Tool Number selected will be replaced with a copy of the current tool.

Part Program Tool Review

Use the PART PROGRAM TOOL REVIEW softkey on the Program Review screen to review the tools used in a specific part program. This screen lists all tools used in a program, and the program block where they are used. The location column indicates if the tool is in Manual, Auto, or Spindle.
List of tools used in program Supplier, Order, Notes, Tool Life tabs can be used to keep track of other tool information

Program blocks in which highlighted tool is used (highlight block and select the EDIT BLOCK F1 softkey to jump to the program block)

Figure 412. Part Program Tool Review of a Conversational program

4 - 34 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Jump to a program block by highlighting the block and selecting the EDIT BLOCK F1 softkey. Tool information can be entered into the Supplier, Order, and Notes tabs at the bottom of the Part Program Review screen. Tool notes can be entered and viewed on the Notes tab in the Part Program Tool Review screen and the Advanced Tool Settings screen. Notes can also be viewed in the Select Tool screen (accessed with the Select Tool from List softkey when entering a tool in a program block). The Supplier, Order, and Notes tabs are only available with the Tool & Material Library option.

Part Program Tool Review for NC Programs

Part Program Tool Review in NC programming scans the current NC program for T codes to determine the tools used in the program. T codes are ignored if they are inside a comment (surrounded by parentheses) or if they are an argument in a macro call (preceded by a G65). Tools are listed by number. When a tool is selected (highlighted), the Block list will display the number and NC text of all blocks that contain the T code for a tool change to the selected tool, as shown below:

List of tools used in program

Program blocks in which highlighted tool is used (highlight block and select the EDIT BLOCK F1 softkey to jump to the program block) Figure 413. Part Program Tool Review of an NC program

Jump to a program block by highlighting the block and selecting the EDIT BLOCK F1 softkey. If a tool in the current NC program is not defined in Tool Setup, it appears in the Tool Review list as an unknown tool with a diameter of 0 and an unknown location. This is

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-35

shown below.

Figure 414. Tool Review showing Unknown tool in NC program

An undefined tool can be added to the NC tool setup by selecting the tool in the list, selecting the Tool Setup softkey, and selecting a type or entering data for the new tool. The tool can also be quickly added as an unknown tool with a diameter of 0 by selecting the Add As Manual Tool softkey.

Part Program Tool Review Softkeys

Softkeys on the Part Program Tool Review screen are: Import Functions F1access the Part Setup screen to establish part zero, centerline, offset Z, safety work region, and other parameters. See Import / Export Functions, on page 4 - 53 for more information. Tool Setup F2access Tool Setup. See Tool Setup, on page 4 - 21 for more information. Part Programming F3access and create data blocks of a part program. The current program's data blocks appear on screen when this softkey is used. Delete, add, edit, and navigate through the data blocks. The NC editor is displayed for NC programs. See Conversational Part Programming for more information. Program Parameters F4accesses the Program Parameters screen to specify data common to all program data blocks. See Program Parameters, on page 4 - 42 for more information. Tool Change Review Screen F5access the Tool Change Review screen to

4 - 36 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

see all tool changes in the part program. Available with the Tool Change Optimization option. See Tool Change Optimization in the Options manual for more information. Match Tools F6access tool matching results. See Tool Matching, on page 4 - 37 for more information. Add As Manual Tool F7adds the highlighted unmatched tool as a Manual tool in the Tool & Material Library and assigns it the next available tool number.

Tool Matching
When a new program is loaded and the Tool & Material Library option is enabled: 1. The new programs tools are compared to the tools in the Tool & Material Library to identify a match by tool type and diameter. The diameter is set in the Tool Matching: Maximum Diameter Difference field in Tool Utilities and Settings, on page 3 - 8. 2. If only one tool match is found, the program will use that tool number, including the Zero Calibration, from the Tool & Material Library. Note that Feed and Speed data will not be replaced in the program. 3. If more than one match exists, WinMax then looks at tool number. If it finds the same tool number, type, and diameter, it will match the tool. 4. If there are no matches, tools are either loaded into the Tool & Material Library as Manual, or users can select from a list of tools in the Tool & Material Library that are similar to the unmatched tool. The AUTOMATICALLY LOAD UNMATCHED TOOLS AS MANUAL field in Tool Utilities and Settings, on page 3 - 8 controls this: When the field is set to Yes, any unmatched tools from the new part program will be added to the Tool & Material Library and will be assigned to the first available tool number. For example, a new program is loaded with tool #12 as a 0.375 inch end mill. If tool #12 in the Tool & Material Library is not a 0.375 inch end mill and no other tool in the Tool & Material Library is a 0.375 inch end mill, then this tool will be added to the Tool & Material Library as a Manual tool and will be assigned the first available tool number. When the field is set to NO, a prompt to match tools appears. Answer YES to the prompt to review the unmatched tools.

Tools that are unmatched are displayed in Tool Matching Results.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-37

Tool Matching Results

When tools from the part program cannot find a matching tool in the Tool & Material Library, these unmatched tools are listed in the Tool Matching Results screen, accessed with the MATCH TOOLS softkey from the Tool Review screen. Unmatched tools from the current part program are listed in the upper Tools to be matched section; as each unmatched tool is highlighted, a list of tools from the Tool & Material Library with the same tool type are listed in the lower, Closest matches section. Tools of the same type are listed in order of closest to furthest diameter difference from the highlighted tool.

Unmatched tools

Difference in tool diameter from unmatched tool

List of similar tools in Tool Library (list corresponds to the highlighted tool)

Figure 415. Tool Matching Results

The CHOOSE AS REPLACEMENT F4 softkey appears when you select a tool from the Closest matches list. Use this softkey to replace an unmatched tool with the selected tool from the Tool & Material Library. If there is not a match in Closest matches, use the EXIT softkey to return to the Part Program Tool Review screen, and use the ADD AS MANUAL TOOL F4 softkey to add the tool to the Tool & Material Library. Use the TOOL SETUP F1 softkey to see the tool details. The SAVE TO DATABASE F6 softkey appears when you select an unmatched tool from the list. Select the softkey to save the tool to the Tool and Material Database. Saving a tool to the Tool and Material Database will not match a tool with an existing tool in the Tool & Material Library. The program will still consider the tool unmatched and will not run until a match is selected or a new tool is added to the Tool & Material Library.

4 - 38 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Tool Management
Tool Management screens are accessed in Manual Mode with the TOOL MANAGEMENT F1 softkey. Tool information can be stored independent of the part program data using the Tool & Material Library option. Program-specific tool information (such as feed rate and speed) created for one program can be reused when tools are selected from the library for a subsequent program. Tool Management tabs are: Spindleshows the tool located in the machines spindle. Autolists the tools that are in the machines tool magazine. Manuallists the tools that may be utilized on the machine but are not currently in the machines magazine or spindle. The Manual tab is active only with the Tool & Material Library option.

Spindle
The Spindle tab displays information about the tool in spindle and allows you to set the next tool to execute a tool change, or to change the current tool in spindle. Fields are: NEXT TOOLlists the next tool to call into the spindle TOOL IN SPINDLElists the current tool in the spindle

Auto
The Auto tab lists the tools in the ATC (automatic tool changer) magazine. Tools are listed by pocket number. The view can be customized to show only occupied pockets or to disable even-numbered pockets (for large tools), using the checkboxes at the top of the screen. Softkeys on the Tool Library Auto tab are: MOVE TOOL TO SPINDLE F1when spindle is empty, highlighting a tool on the Auto or Manual lists will enable this softkey. Select to confirm and the tool will appear on the SPINDLE tab. The control will prompt to insert the tool into the spindle. SELECT TOOL F2highlight a tool in the list and touch this softkey to select the tool CLEAR POCKET F3removes the selected tool from the pocket CLEAR ALL POCKETS F4removes all tools from the Auto list

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-39

Manual
The Manual tab shows tools available for use that are resident on the control, but are not currently in the spindle or ATC. The Manual tab is active only with the Tool & Material Library option: Softkeys are: MOVE TOOL TO SPINDLE F1when spindle is empty, highlighting a tool on the Auto or Manual lists will enable this softkey. Select to confirm and the tool will appear on the SPINDLE tab. The control will prompt to insert the tool into the spindle. INSERT TOOL F3moves a tool from Manual to Auto. Tool Setup F4accesses the Tool Setup screen. CHANGE TOOL NUMBER F5allows you to change the number of a tool in the list. See Change Tool Number, on page 4 - 34 for more information. CLEAR TOOLS F6clears (removes) tools from the list: CLEAR SELECTED TOOL F1removes highlighted tool from the Tool Library. CLEAR AUTO AND MANUAL TOOLS F2removes all tools from the Tool Library. CLEAR AUTO TOOLS F3removes all tools in Auto from the Tool Library. CLEAR MANUAL TOOLS F4removes all tools in Manual from the Tool Library.

4 - 40 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Tool and Material Database

The Tool and Material Database is available when the Tool & Material Library option is enabled. It is accessed in Auxiliary Mode. Tool and material information can be entered and stored in the database. The materials entered into the database are available in the work material list located on the Feed and Speed tab in Tool Type Setup/Advanced Tool Settings. This information is saved in the material database and can be utilized in future part programs without re-entering the speeds and feeds. To add a tool to the database: 1. Select the TOOLS tab. 2. Select ADD TOOL F1 softkey. 3. Enter the tool information in the fields. See Advanced Tool Settings, on page 4 - 27 for more information about these fields. Softkeys on the TOOLS tab are: Add Toolaccesses Tool Type Setup screen to add a tool to the database. Edit Toolaccesses Tool Setup to edit tool. Delete Tooldeletes the selected tool from the database.

To add a material to the database: 1. Select the MATERIALS tab. 2. Select the ADD MATERIAL F1 softkey. 3. Type the name of the material in the NAME field. 4. Add any notes in the NOTES field. 5. Select the SAVE F1 softkey. Softkeys on the MATERIALS tab are: Add Materialadd a new material to the database. Edit Materialchange the specifications of a material in the database. Delete Materialdelete a material from the database. Select Material for Part Programuses the highlighted material in the current part program.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-41

Program Parameters
Program parameters are displayed on tabs for General 1, General 2, Milling 1, Milling 2, Holes, Probing, and Performance. The Performance tab in WinMax is active when the SelectSurface Finish Quality option is enabled. The programmer has the option to make changes to any or all of the program parameters and save them as user defaults. The user defaults and original WinMax defaults can be restored by using the appropriate softkey. Parameters can be altered with the Change Parameters data block during program execution. Refer to Conversational Part Programming for details. Refer to these sections in Program Parameters: General Parameters 1, on page 4 - 43 General Parameters 2, on page 4 - 44 Milling Parameters 1, on page 4 - 45 Milling Parameters 2, on page 4 - 48 Holes Parameters, on page 4 - 50 Probing Parameters, on page 4 - 51 Performance Parameters, on page 4 - 52 Refer to NC Part Programming for information about NC Parameters. Softkeys on the Program Parameters screen are: Save As User Defaultssaves the selected fields value as the user-defined default value Restore User Defaultsrestores the user-defined values to a field that has been populated with other values Restore Winmax Defaultsrestores the WinMax-defined values to a field that has been populated with other values. Change Parameters program blocks load the user-defined parameters set in Program Parameters. NC Parametersaccesses NC Configuration Parameters. These parameters are available only with NC Part Programming.

4 - 42 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

General Parameters 1
These are the fields on the General 1 tab: Retract ClearanceDetermines the Z coordinate to which the Z axis positions before rapid table positioning. This includes a tool moving from one drilled hole to another, or from one milling operation to another (programmed in separate data blocks or generated as a patterns operation). The default is the maximum programmable Z travel. This is the difference between the Z-Axis MAX Travel and the Z-Axis MIN Travel as indicated on the Machine Specifications screen. The range is 0 through 99.9999 inches (0 through 2514.6 mm). If the next operation has a different Z Start value, the CNC always retracts to the highest dimension. When a Position block is programmed, the tool always retracts to the safety plane programmed as Z Top of the Safety Work Region. Enable Pecking Retract ClearanceEnables the use of a different retract clearance for pecking operations. When set to On, the tool retracts to the height specified in the Pecking Retract Clearance parameter (below). When set to Off, the tool retracts to the Retract Clearance height. Default is Off. Pecking Retract ClearanceSpecifies the height above Z Start to which the tool should move between operations. Field is active when Enable Pecking Retract Clearance parameter is set to On. Rapid TraverseDetermines the feedrate that the table (X and Y axes) moves between one point in the part program to the next point in the program (rapid table positioning). The default is 400 ipm (10160.0 mm/min). The Range MAX value is user-defined in the Maximum Rapid Traverse Rate field on the Machine Specifications screen. The Range MIN value is 0.1 ipm (2.54 mm/min).

Peck Clearance PlaneDetermines the relative distance to the previous peck level. In conversational programming, the tool retracts to Z Start after each peck. The tool then rapids down to a position which is the Peck Clearance distance above the previous peck level before plunging to the next peck level at plunge feedrate. The default is 0.05 inches (1.27 mm). The range is 0 through 99.9999 inches (0 through 2514.6 mm).

Chord ErrorDetermines the maximum distance the cutter deviates from the true arc path. Override LockoutDisables the Axis Feed dial on the jog unit of Hurco controls when set to On. The default is Off.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-43

General Parameters 2
These are the fields on the General 2 tab: Depletion RetractSpecifies the dimension above the part surface to which the Z axis retracts. The Z axis retracts while waiting for additional data to be transmitted into the current program during execution of an NC part program. The default is 0.005 inches (.127 mm). The range is 0 through 99.9999 inches (0 through 2514.6 mm). Depletion Retract only applies to NC programs. Interrupt Cycle Z RetractRetracts the Z axis to Retract Clearance when you press the Interrupt Cycle console button on a Hurco control. Select No to keep the spindle in its current position when the button is pressed. The default is Yes.

First Peck OffsetPermits modifying the depth of the first peck in milling and hole operations. Use this feature whenever a first peck needs to be deeper or shallower than subsequent pecks. The permitted range is 10.0000 to + 10.0000 inches or 254.00 to +254.000 millimeters. The First Peck Offset value is added to the operations peck depth in calculating the first peck only. Use a positive First Peck Offset value for deeper peck and negative value for shallower peck. A First Peck Offset of 0.000 will run the pecks normally, without any First Peck Offset. For example, if the peck depth in a drill operation is set to 0.2000 inches and First Peck Offset is set to +0.0500 inches, then the first peck will be 0.2500 inches down from Z start plane and all subsequent pecks will be 0.2000 inches deep. If the First Peck Offset is set to 0.0500 inches, the result is a first peck only 0.1500 inches down from Z start plane and every subsequent peck will be 0.2000 inches deep.

Move to Safe Pos During TCIndicates whether or not the table will move to the right/front of the machine when the operator is changing a tool. If this field is set to Yes when a part program block calls for a tool change, the table will move out of the way. Include Offset Z in Tool Zero CalIndicates whether or not the Offset Z value in Part Setup is added to the zero calibration value when tool lengths are adjusted. Default is Yes. YesZero Calibration is adjusted by the Offset Z value. NoZero Calibration is the distance from machine home to the tool tip when positioned at the workpiece or gauge block.

Tool Change OptimizationIndicates if Tool Change Optimization should be enabled for the program. Default is Yes. (This field is available in Program Parameters only; it is not available in Change Parameters.) NoAny Tool Change Optimization blocks are ignored by the program. YesTool Change Optimization blocks are used by the program.

4 - 44 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

See Tool Change Optimization in the Options manual.

Milling Parameters 1
Milling parameters apply to cutter motions during conversational milling operations only. Milling 1 Parameters fields are defined as follows: Blend OffsetDetermines the distance from the entry point of the part surface and the Z plunge point where the tool enters the work piece. This field is used in milling circles, frames, and ellipses; it is also used in contours with Milling Type set to Left/Right or Profile Left/Profile Right and Enable Blend Moves set to Yes. The default is 0.1181 inches (3 mm). The range is 0 through 1.0 inch (0 through 25.4 mm).

Blend OverlapDetermines the distance the tool travels past the entry point before it is withdrawn from the part. This field is used in milling circles, frames, and ellipses; it is also used in contours with Milling Type set to Left/ Right or Profile Left/Profile Right and Enable Blend Moves set to Yes. The default is 0.1181 inches (3 mm). The range is 0 through 1.0 inch (0 through 25.4 mm).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Start Point 1/2 X Length X Length Blend Offset Tool Path Blend Offset Blend Overlap End Point

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-45

Figure 416. Blend Offset and Blend Overlap

Finish Feed (%)Allows you to specify a different feed for finishing operations without changing the tool. The specified percentage is a multiplier of the feed entered in Tool Setup. This multiplier is applied whenever the tool is entered for the finishing operation of a milling block. (See example below.) If this parameter is changed in either Program Parameters or with a Change Parameters block, all existing data blocks that are affected by the multiplier will be updated.

Finish Speed (%)Allows you to specify a different speed for finishing operations without changing the tool. The specified percentage is a multiplier of the speed entered in Tool Setup. This multiplier is applied whenever the tool is entered for the finishing operation of a milling block. (See example below.) If this parameter is changed in either Program Parameters or with a Change Parameters block, all existing data blocks that are affected by the multiplier will be updated. Finish Feed / Finish Speed example: Program Parameters: Finish Speed %=120, Finish Feed %=80 Tool Setup: Speed=5000, Feed=100 When a program block is created, the speed is automatically set to 5000 and the feed is set to 100. When the tool is entered into the finishing operation, the multipliers are applied, and finish speed is set to 6000 (5000 x 120%), finish feed is set to 80 (100 x 80%). The Finish Feed and Finish Speed parameters are not applied if the roughing feed or speed in a data block is changed. Values entered manually into the Finish Feed or Finish Speed fields in the data block take precedence over these parameters. If the Tool & Material Library option is enabled, separate roughing and finishing defaults can be set for each tool. If finishing defaults are defined for a tool, those values take precedence over the Finish Feed and Finish Speed multiplier parameters.

Stock Allowance ModeSpecifies whether the Finish XY and Finish Z parameters used are those set in Program Parameters (Program Parameters mode) or those set in the individual data blocks (Data Block mode). In Data Block mode, the Allowance tab is active in the data block, and the values entered there supercede the Finish XY and Finish Z values contained in Program Parameters. In Data Block mode, the value must be entered in the data block; it is not applied automatically.

Finish XYDetermines the amount of material in the X-Y axis direction to be removed by the finish pass. The default is 0.2 mm (0.007874 inches).
704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

4 - 46 Programming Basics

The range is 0 through 25.4 mm (0 through 1.0 inches). Stock is removed up to a maximum of 90% of tool diameter. For example, if 25 mm is entered in the Finish XY field, and the tool has a diameter of 10 mm, the XY stock removed on the finish pass will be 9 mm (90% of the 10 mm tool diameter), despite the number entered in the Finish XY field.

Finish ZDetermines the amount of material in the Z axis dimension to be removed by the finish pass. The default is 0.1 mm (0.003937inches). The range is 0 through 1.0 inch (0 through 25.4 mm). If Finish Z is zero on a pocketing finish pass, the tool only runs around the inside pocket wall.

Milling DirectionDetermines the milling type. Select Conventional or Climb milling for canned milling cycles (e.g., frame, circle, and ellipse) and for contours (e.g., line, arc). The default is Climb. The choices are Conventional or Climb.

Default Pocket OverlapDetermines the cutter step-over movement in a pocket milling operation. After the first pass, the tool follows a path produced by offsetting the boundary by the tool radius, plus the pocket overlap for each pass while avoiding islands inside the boundary. The default is 50%. The range is 0 through 99%.

Cutter Comp ParamDetermines the programmed tool automatically follows the finished contour of the part with cutter compensation. Without cutter compensation, the center line of the programmed tool follows the print line. Insert ArcInserts a tangent arc to connect two line segments, or a line segment and an arc segment (when the two cutter compensated segments are offset and do not intersect).

1 2 3

Programmed Tool Path Cutter Compensated Path Using the Insert Arc Parameter

Figure 417. Cutter Compensation using the Insert Arc parameter

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-47

Insert LineJoins the cutter compensated lines and arcs as described below: Two line segments are extended until they intersect (provided they form a 90 or greater angle). If the lines form an angle of less than 90, a line is inserted to connect them. Line and arc segments have the line segment extended, and a tangent line to the arc segment inserted and extended until the lines intersect (provided they form a 90 or greater angle). If the segments form an angle of less than 90, a line is inserted to connect them. Two arc segments have tangent lines (to the arcs) inserted and extended until the lines intersect (provided the extended tangent lines form a 90 or greater angle). If the extended tangent lines form an angle of less than 90, a line or arc is inserted to connect them.

1 2 3

Programmed Tool Path Cutter Compensated Path Completed Path Using the Insert Line Parameter

Figure 418. Cutter Compensation using the Insert Line parameter

Milling Parameters 2
The Milling 2 Parameters fields are available only when the Helical Plunge option is installed. The parameters are: Mill Plunge Typespecifies the plunging strategy to use for the milling pass. Choose Straight or Helix. The default setting is Straight. Mill Plunge Ramp Slopedefines the slope of the helical ramp for the milling tool. The range is 1 to 90. Choosing 90 will result in a Straight Plunge. The default value is 10. Mill Plunge Helix Radiusused for specifying the Helical Plunge radius as a percentage of the tool diameter. The range is from 0% to 100%. Choosing 0% results in a Straight Plunge. If a value of 50% or less is chosen, it will prevent a post (a thin cylinder of material formed after helical plunging) from being formed by the Helical Plunge. The default setting is 25%. Finish Plunge Typespecifies the plunging strategy to use for the finish phase. Choose Straight or Helix. The default setting is Straight. Finish Plunge Ramp Slopedefines the slope of the Helical Ramp for the finishing tool. Range is 1 to 90. Choosing 90 will result in a Straight

4 - 48 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Plunge. The default setting is 25. Finish Plunge Helix Radiusdefines the value of the Helical Plunge radius as a percentage of the diameter of the finishing tool. The range is 0% to 100%. If a value of 50% or less is chosen, it will prevent a post from being formed by the Helical Plunge. The default setting is 25%. Operator Specify Pocket Startif Yes, the pocket start location fields will appear on pocket boundary screens, when Pocket Type Inward is selected. The default setting is No. The value of Pocket Plunge Near Center is ignored. Pocket Plunge Near Centerif Yes, UltiPocket will attempt to perform a plunge at the approximate center of the pocket and then move to the start point of the pocket. If the software detects an interference with plunging in the center, the plunge will be made at the start of the tool path. The default setting is No. The Pocket Plunge Near Center parameter may be used with frames, circles, ellipses, and contours with Pocket Type Inward, and contours with Pocket Type Outward. Frames, circles, and ellipses with Pocket Type Outward automatically attempt to plunge to the center. Allow Plunge Outside Pocketif Yes, UltiPocket will plunge outside the pocket, moving through the open side of the pocket boundary. May be used with open contours only; cannot be applied to frames, circles, or ellipses because they cannot be programmed with open contours.

Open Contour Plunge point

Toolpath

The Operator Specify Pocket Start parameter must also be set to Yes. The contour Pocket Type must be set to Inward. The plunge point should be placed near the open side of the contour outside the pocket. The tool moves through this opening near the approximate center. The software verifies the tool will fit through the opening and generates an error message if it will not.

Refer to Helical Plunge in WinMax Mill Options for details about this option.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-49

Holes Parameters
The Holes Parameters fields are defined below: Bore Orient Retractspecifies the distance the boring tool moves away from the part surface at the end of the boring cycle. Used only when a Bore Orient data block is included in the part program. The default is 0.05 mm (0.019685 inches). The range is 0 through 99.9999 inches (0 through 2514.6 mm).

Drill Dwellspecifies the pause (dwell) in seconds before the tool retracts at the bottom of a drill operation. The most often changed Holes Parameter is Drill Dwell. This parameter controls the length of time the drill stays at the bottom of a hole after it has drilled the hole. This parameter is not used for NC programs. The default is 0.0 (When set to 0.0 seconds, the drill immediately retracts out of the hole after it is drilled.) The range is 0 through 20 seconds.

Bore Dwellspecifies the pause in seconds before the tool retracts at the bottom of a Bore operation. This parameter is not used for NC programs. The default is 1.0 seconds. The range is 0 through 20 seconds.

Tap Retract (%) (UltiMotion only)specifies the retract speed for a tap operation, as a percentage of the plunge speed. The default is 100% (retract speed = plunge speed). The range is 50-1000%.

4 - 50 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Probing Parameters
The Probing Parameters are: Automatic Tool Monitoringindicate if tools that were calibrated with the probe should be automatically checked with each tool change. Zero Cal (Length) Toleranceindicate the zero calibration (tool length) used when checking for a defective tool with automatic monitoring. Diameter Toleranceindicate the diameter tolerance used when checking for a defective tool with automatic monitoring.

See also Automatic Tool Monitoring in Options. Retain Probed Part Setupallows the probed part setup and/or tool calibrations to be retained for new program runs. Choices are: Do Not Retainno updates will be made to part zero or tool lengths. Retain Allretains part setup and tool calibrations. Previous versions of WinMax may have included additional selections which have subsequently been removed; older programs that contained a selection other than Do Not Retain or Retain All will be converted to Retain All upon opening, and a message will appear informing the user. For example, the following table shows Part Setup values for a sample program before and after a Probed Part Setup is executed: Original Part Setup values Part Zero X = 20.0000 Part Zero Y = 10.0000 Probe Z = 15.0000 Skew Angle = 0.0000 Zero Cal = 18.0000 (Tool Setup) Probed Part Setup values Part Zero X = 19.1234 Part Zero Y = 11.1111 Probe Z = 16.5555 Skew Angle = 2.0045 Zero Cal = 17.4444 (Tool Setup)

If Retain Probed Part Setup is set to Do Not Retain, the original values for Part Setup and Zero Cal will be restored. Part Setup and Tool Setup will contain the original data (20, 10, 15, 0, and 18). If Retain Probed Part Setup is set to Retain All, Part Setup and Tool Setup will contain the probed values (19.1234, 11.1111, 16.5555, 2.0045, and 17.4444). OFFSET Z is not affected in any way by the probe block or the parameter setting. Start Coordinate Referenceindicates if the start coordinates for a Probe Part Setup are relative to the machine zero or to the active part zero.
704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-51

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Performance Parameters
Surface Finish Quality (SFQ) is enabled with the SelectSurface Finish Quality option. SFQ parameters can be modified in either Conversational or NC programming. The default SFQ for roughing is 80 and finishing is 20. Recommended values are: SFQ
1-20 21-79 80-100
Table 41.

Desired Result
High precision parts /finishing Good surface quality / finishing, semi-finishing High throughput / roughing

Recommended SFQ values

If SelectSurface Finish Quality is not enabled, conversational roughing tools use SFQ of 80 and conversational finishing tools use SFQ of 20; NC default is 50. Smoothing Tolerance specifies the maximum allowable deviation from the tool path. The range is 0.0000 to 0.0500 inches (0.0000 to 1.2700 mm); default is 0.0005 inches (0.01270 mm). This corresponds to NC code G05.2.

4 - 52 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Import / Export Functions

Import Functions imports Part Setup, Tool Setup, Program Parameters, Part Program information, and/or NC states from an existing Conversational program or NC State file into the active part program. Tool lists can also be imported or exported from this menu (with the Tool & Material Library option installed). 1. Select the Import / Export Functions softkey from the Input screen. 2. Select the appropriate softkey to import from a Conversational file, or to import or export NC state or Tool Library. 3. Choose the origination or destination file, or select an operation for the Tool Library then select the appropriate file. 4. Select the Import or Export softkey. 5. Choose one or more components from the list and select the Begin Operation softkey.

Conversational Components
These are the Conversational components that can be imported from an existing part program into a new part program: Part Setupimports the Part Setup from the selected program into the current part program. Tool Setupimports tools from the Tool Setup of the selected part program to the current tool setup on the machine. If the Tool & Material Library option is enabled, unique tools are added as Manual and other tools may be matched (see Tool Matching, on page 4 - 37). Program Parametersimports the Program Parameters from the selected program into the current part program. Part Programimports the part program from the selected program into the current part program.

NC States
NC components are stored in the NC State file on the control. Only one NC State file exists on a control, and it is updated as changes are made to current or new NC programs. When transferring an NC program from one machine to another the NC State file from the can be imported or exported using the Import (or Export) NC State From (To) File softkey. These are the components that can be imported into an NC file: Program Parametersimports the Program Parameters. Part Setup / Work Offsetsimports the Part Setup and Work Offsets. Tool Setupimports tools from the Tool Setup of the selected part program to the current tool setup on the machine. If the Tool & Material Library option is enabled, unique tools are added as Manual and other tools may be matched (see Tool Matching, on page 4 - 37).
704-0116-115 Programming Basics 4-53

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Tool Offsetsimports Tool Offsets. NC Parametersimports the NC parameters. NC Variablesimports NC variables. The imported components will replace the current components from the open program; they are not merged together.

NC States are saved as follows: 1. Select the Import / Export Functions softkey from the Input screen. 2. Select the Save NC State To File softkey. 3. Choose the location to which the file will be saved in the Save State File screen. 4. Type the name of the file in the FILE NAME field, or use the default, ncstate.ncsx, which appears automatically in this field. It is recommended to rename the NC States file to match the active part program. When renaming, you must retain the .ncs extension at the end of the file name. For example, Program Name.ncsx. 5. Select the SAVE F1 softkey to save the NC States file. A message that the file saved successfully will briefly appear on screen.

Importing NC States into Conversational Programs

NC States information that is valid for Conversational programs (the Part Setup, Tool Setup, and Program Parameters) can be imported into a Conversational program. 1. Make sure the current part program is Conversational. 2. Select the IMPORT FUNCTIONS softkey from the Input screen. 3. Select the IMPORT NC STATE FROM FILE softkey. 4. Choose the NC States file from which components will be imported and select the LOAD F1 softkey. Either file may be used to import any component. 5. Choose one or more components from the list and select the BEGIN OPERATION softkey. 6. Select OK to continue the import operation.

4 - 54 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Import and Export Tool Library

Import and Export Tool Library functions are available only with the Tool and Material Library option. The Import / Export Tool Library softkey allows you to move tool information from the WinMax control to other locations and vice versa. Import / Export Tool Library submenu softkeys are: Export Auto And Manual Toolssave Auto and Manual tools to a different directory. Export Manual Tool Listsave only the Manual tools to a different directory. Import Into Manual Tool Listload tools into the control from a directory. All tools are imported into the Manual list, even if they were exported as Auto tools. The ATC positions are not retained when tools are imported. Export Tool and Material Databasesave tool templates and materials to a different directory. Append Tool and Material Databaseload tool templates and materials into the control from a directory. These are added to the existing database on the control. Replace Tool and Material Databaseload tool templates and materials into the control from a directory. The existing database is replaced.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-55

Copy and Change Blocks

To make changes to several data blocks at one time, use the Copy and Change Blocks softkey to access the Block Editor. These are the softkeys: Copy BlocksDuplicate the specified data blocks in another location in the part program. Move BlocksRemove the specified data blocks from their current location and transfer them to another location in the part program. Delete BlocksRemove the specified data blocks from the part program. Modify DimensionsAdd offsets to the axes' coordinate dimensions currently stored in the part program for a range of blocks. Change All Feeds, Speeds, and ToolsSubstitutes new feeds and speeds for all tools within the specified range of data blocks. Change Feeds and Speeds by ToolSubstitutes new speeds and feedrates for a specified tool within a range of data blocks. The following fields appear when you select either softkey, except where noted otherwise: Start BlockEnter the number of the first block in the program to be changed. End BlockEnter the number of the last block in the program to be changed. Put Block BeforeMove a block in the program before the indicated block. Change Tool NumberIdentify the tool number. Blocks using this tool number will be changed. (This field appears only for the Change Feeds and Speeds by Tools screen.) See Change Tool Number, on page 4 - 34 for more information. New Speed (RPM)Enter a new Speed (RPM). New FeedEnter a new Feed. New Plunge FeedEnter a new Plunge Feed. New ToolEnter a new Tool. New Finish ToolEnter a new Speed (RPM).

Enter the changes in the fields and select the Make the Change softkey. The Copy Blocks, Move Blocks, and Delete Blocks softkeys are also available for editing a current program.

4 - 56 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Copy, Move, or Delete Blocks

The COPY BLOCKS screen is used to duplicate the specified data blocks in another location in the part program. The MOVE BLOCKS screen is used to remove the specified data blocks from their current location and transfer them to another location in the part program. The DELETE BLOCKS screen is used to remove specified data blocks from the part program. Fields on the screens are: Start BlockEnter the number of the first block in the program to be changed. End BlockEnter the number of the last block in the program to be changed. Put Block BeforeMove a block in the program before the indicated block.

Modify Dimensions
Modify Dimensions allows you to add offsets to the axes' coordinate dimensions currently stored in the part program for a range of blocks. These softkey choices appear when you select the Modify Dimensions softkey: Start Block - enter the number of the first block in the program to be modified. End Block - enter the number of the last block in the program to be modified. X Offset - enter the offset for the X axis. Y Offset - enter the offset for the Y axis. Z Offset - enter the offset for the Z axis. Change Z-Start - enter the new Z-Start position. A Offset - enter the offset for the A axis. B Offset - enter the offset for the B axis.

Enter the modifications in the fields and select the MAKE THE CHANGE softkey to modify the programmed dimensions. Modified dimensions are applied to Pattern blocks that provide their own reference points: Loop Rotate center points, Loop Angular reference and center points, Mirror Image reference point, and Scale reference point.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-57

Changing Feeds, Speeds, and Tools

Feeds, Speeds, and Tools can be changed for a range of blocks in a part program with the following softkeys from the Block Editor screen: Change All Feeds Speeds & Toolschange Feed, Speed, and Tool for specified program blocks. Fields are: Start BlockEnter the number of the first block in the program to be changed. End BlockEnter the number of the last block in the program to be changed. New Speed (RPM)Enter a new Speed (RPM). New FeedEnter a new Feed. New Plunge FeedEnter a new Plunge Feed. New ToolEnter a new Tool. New Finish ToolEnter a new Speed (RPM).

Change Feeds & Speeds By ToolMake changes to feeds and speeds for blocks using a specified tool. Fields are: Start BlockEnter the number of the first block in the program to be changed. End BlockEnter the number of the last block in the program to be changed. Change ToolEnter tool; changes will be made only to blocks using this tool. New Speed (RPM)Enter a new Speed (RPM). New FeedEnter a new Feed. New Plunge FeedEnter a new Plunge Feed. New ToolEnter a new Tool.

Change Surface Finish Quality

The surface finish quality can be changed for a range of blocks in a part program. Fields are: Start BlockEnter the number of the first block in the program to be changed. End BlockEnter the number of the last block in the program to be changed. Change Rough SFQSpecify Yes or No. Rough SFQEnter the Rough SFQ for the range of blocks. Change Finish SFQSpecify Yes or No. Finish SFQEnter the Finish SFQ for the range of blocks.

4 - 58 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Review Mode
The Program Review screen is accessed with the console Review key.
Sub-blocks within the selected data block List of programs data blocks Select to jump to selected data block or sub-block Tools and Notes for the selected block

Figure 419. Program Review Screen

Data blocks and sub blocks of the active part program are displayed. Program blocks can be moved and added in the Program Review screen. Tool data and notes are displayed in the Tools and Notes tabs: Tool information for the selected data block is displayed in the Tools tab. When a tool is selected the Edit Tool softkey is displayed and will open Tool Setup for the selected tool. Notes can be entered for the selected data block or sub block in the Notes tab. Notes are displayed on the Review screen and with the data block when the blocks are printed.

Program Review softkeys are: Multiple Block Functions F1allows multiple blocks to be cut, copied, or pasted between programs: Cut F1highlight data block(s) and touch this softkey to delete from the current program. Block(s) can then be pasted into the same or a different program. Copy F2highlight data block(s) and select this softkey to make a copy that can be pasted into the same or a different program. Paste F3places previously cut or copied data block(s) above the highlighted data block.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-59

Delete F4highlight data block(s) and touch this softkey to permanently remove the block from the program. Multiple blocks can be selected simultaneously by holding the F and Alt keys while pressing the up or down arrow keys.

Convert to Rotary F6converts linear dimensions to rotary dimensions; a flat geometry can be wrapped around a cylinder, given a radius. Blocks that can be wrapped are: contour, circle, frame, slot, polygon, TrueType lettering holes (locations), and patterns (loop linear, loop rectangular, and mirror). Convert to Linear F7converts rotary dimensions to linear dimensions. For WinMax Desktop and WinMax Mill on machines not equipped with rotary, the Default Conversational Program Type must be changed to a rotary type in order to convert the program to rotary. This is changed in Conversational Settings in Utilities.

Delete Block / Delete Sub Block F2deletes the highlighted data block or sub-block. Part Programming F3allows you to edit the selected data block or subblock. See Part Programming in the Conversational Programming manual for more information. Program Parameters F4access General, Milling, Holes, Probing, and Performance parameters. NC parameters are accessible for NC programs. Import / Export Functions F5access the Part Setup screen to establish part zero, centerline, offset Z, safety work region, and other parameters. Part Program Tool Review F6review the tools used in the part program. Insert Block / Sub Block Before F7inserts a new program block or subblock before the selected block or sub-block.

4 - 60 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Manual Safety Override Mode

For machines with CE safety circuit switches enabled, the Manual Safety Override mode allows the enclosure doors to be opened when the system is in Manual mode so the operator or supervisor can perform limited manual machine operations. While the doors are open, manual jog feed is restricted. The jog feed is limited to 2 meters per minute, or approximately 80 inches per minute, with manual safety override enabled. No jogging is permitted with manual safety override disabled. Manual operations that cannot be started with the doors open, regardless of manual safety override mode, are: Spindle On Park Machine Warm Up Machine Calibrate Machine Spindle Orient Chip Removal Tool Changer Functions

When the Manual Safety Override mode is enabled, it remains enabled until control power is turned off, the Emergency Stop button is pressed, or machine power is turned off. A fault will disable the Manual Safety Override mode also. If you try to jog the axes with the doors open without enabling the manual safety override mode, a prompt appears to cycle the keyswitch or enter the access code to enable jog.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-61

CE Diagnostics
To enable the Safety Override mode, access the CE Status & Diagnostics screen. 1. From the Manual mode screen, select the Diagnostics softkey. 2. Select the CE Diagnostics softkey. The following screen appears:

Figure 420. CE Status & Diagnostics Screen

The fields on the CE Status & Diagnostics screen are defined as follows: CE ConfigurationDisplays CE logic configuration. Enabled or disabled in Integrator Support Services. Door Lock StatusDisplays status of all doors with CE safety circuit switches Unlocked or Locked. The Door Switch Status must be Closed when the Door Lock Status is Locked. Door Switch StatusDisplays status as Closed or Open. The switch must be Closed when the Door Lock Status is Locked. Limited Manual OperationsDisplays status as Disabled or Enabled. Status is Enabled after entering an access code. Enabled allows limited safe motion with the doors open. EIR Relay StateDisplays status as Disabled or Enabled. When enabled, the enclosure doors have been locked due to a process request or an active process.

4 - 62 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Entering the Access Code

A numeric access code is required to enable Limited Manual Operations. Follow these steps to enter the access code: 1. Select the Enter Access Code softkey. A message appears with a prompt for entering a 4 digit code. 2. Enter a numeric code using the console keypad. Asterisks (*) appear representing each entered digit. When the fourth digit is entered, the asterisks and message disappear. Using a non-numeric key cancels the operation. When the code is successfully entered, the Limited Manual Operations feature is enabled, as indicated in the status field. For initial setup of the Access Code, the user is prompted to enter a new code and then to enter the same code a second time before it is accepted.

Changing an Existing Access Code

To change an existing access code, follow these steps: 1. Select the Change Access Code softkey. A message appears asking you to enter the current code. 2. Enter the current numeric code from the console keypad. A message appears asking you to enter the new code. 3. Enter the new code. A message appears asking you to re-enter the new code for confirmation. If the new code is not re-entered, the code is not changed. When the new code is verified, the code will change and a message appears to confirm the action.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-63

Graphics
WinMax graphics include Toolpath and Solid Graphics, on page 4 - 66. Real-time graphic animation is available with the Runtime tool, which shows a simulated tool cutting the part on screen while the machine is cutting the actual part. Solid graphics and Runtime tool are only available with the Advanced Verification Graphics option.

Graphics Settings
Graphics preferences are set in the Graphics Settings screen, which is accessed with the GRAPHICS SETTINGS F8 softkey. The Graphics Settings screen shows the following:

Display Properties
Fields on the Display tab are: Show Graphicsset the type, either Show All, Toolpath, or Solids. Tool Pathspecify Yes or No to show the tool path (appears as red dashed line). Part Surfacespecify Yes or No to show the part surface (appears as solid cyan line). Rapidsspecify Yes or No to show rapid moves (appears as yellow solid lines). Stock Outlinespecify Yes or No to show the stock outline, which is set in the stock geometry screen (appears as green solid line). Refer to the Stock Geometry section in Part Setup for more information. Plungesspecify Yes or No to show plunge moves (appears as purple lines). Stock Transparencyshows the stock in a solid (Opaque) or clear (Translucent) view. Enable Runtime Tool Displayspecify Yes or No to see simulated tool move around the part while the machine is running; tool also shown when jogging tool near part. Background Colorchoose Black or White background color. Default Viewset the default view when WinMax is started, either XY plane, XZ plane, Isometric, or All Views. Default Zone (dual-zone machines)set the zone initially displayed in graphics when the application is started.

Performance Properties
Fields on the Performance tab are: Show Roughing Tool Path for 2D Surfacesspecify Yes or No to show all the roughing tool path, applies only to Toolpath graphics. Show Roughing Tool Path for 3D Surfacesspecify Yes or No to show all the roughing tool path for 3D Molds and Swept Surfaces, applies only to
704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

4 - 64 Programming Basics

Toolpath graphics. Use Chord Error From Programspecify Yes or No to use the chord error value programmed in general parameters when rendering curves in NC. Graphics Chord Errorenter the chord error to be used when drawing curves in graphics. Graphics Optimizationoptimizes graphics processing and rendering. Default is Full. Refresh Speedchoose the refresh speed for graphics rendering. Choose one of seven options between fastest speed (Fastest Completion) to smoothest rendering (Smoothest).

Axis Configuration
Select the program type and axis settings in this tab to optimize graphics viewing. Fields are: Override Machine Configurationspecify Yes to override the machine configuration with different rotary axis settings for graphics. Rotary Axis ISO Standardspecifies if the positive direction of the rotary axis matches the ISO standard. Available when Override Machine Configuration is set to Yes. Tilt Axis Preferencespecifies the tilt axis preference: neutral, positive, or negative. Available when Override Machine Configuration is set to Yes. Universal Typespecifies the type of machine when using Universal Rotary configuration.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-65

Toolpath and Solid Graphics

Toolpath graphics displays a wireframe view of the part. Toolpath is also animated to show the tool in motion if the runtime tool is displayed (only available with the Advanced Verification Graphics option). Solid graphics displays a solid 3-dimensional part; only available with the Advanced Verification Graphics option.
Denotes the view selected

Indicates the stage of processing

Figure 421. Solid graphic display

The console Draw button initiates drawing. The Draw Options menu is displayed (for both Toolpath and Solid) to control drawing and animation: DRAW OPTIONS F1displays the following draw options: DRAW (PAUSE) F1starts drawing the part. When drawing is in progress, the softkey displays PAUSEselect it to pause the drawing. When paused, the softkey displays DRAWselect it to resume drawing. ACCELERATED DRAW F2displays only the completed drawing without showing each block as it is drawn. There may be a delay before the completed drawing appears on screen; selecting the SHOW PROGRESS F2 softkey displays the drawing at the current point each time the softkey is selected. SINGLE STEP F3displays only one step or program block at a time. Subsequent selection of SINGLE STEP will execute the next step or block. NEXT TOOL CHANGE F4displays cutting from one tool change to the next.

SELECT VIEW F2choose XY plane, XZ plane, YZ plane, Isometric, or All Views. For dual-zone machines, the Select Zone softkey displays Zone 1, Zone 2, or All Zones.

4 - 66 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

ZOOM F3magnifies an area of the graphic. Select the softkey and choose one of the following: Zoom Inmagnify incrementally by 20% each time the softkey is selected. Zoom Outshrink view incrementally by 10% each time the softkey is selected. Default Zoomreturns to the zoom level to the default value. Fit To Viewreturns drawing to the default position, rotation, and zoom levels. Touch-and-dragplace stylus at a point on the screen and drag it to expand the box over the area you wish to magnify. When stylus is lifted from screen the area will be magnified.

PAN F4moves the graphic up, down, left, or right. Use the softkeys (Pan Up, Pan Down, Pan Left, Pan Right, or Center), or touch the screen and drag the graphic. Fit to View returns the drawing to the default position, rotation, and zoom levels. ROTATE F5changes the rotation of the graphic. Softkeys include Rotate Up, Rotate Down, Rotate Left, and Rotate Right. Default Rotation returns rotation to the default value. DB SEARCH F6jumps to a selected data block. Select the softkey, touch an area on the graphic touchscreen, and select the JUMP TO BLOCK softkey. SNAPSHOT F7creates an image of the solid drawing that is stored with the file. The image is displayed on the Program Manager screen when the program is highlighted. GRAPHICS SETTINGS F8displays the Graphics Settings screen.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Programming Basics 4-67

4 - 68 Programming Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

MACHINE OPERATION BASICS

The following sections explain basic machine operation. Machine Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Recovery and Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Automatic Tool Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 HMX Automatic Pallet Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Dual-Zone Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Auto Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Stop Machine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Restart Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Shutdown Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 2 3 4 7 17 24 27 31 33 33

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Machine Operation Basics 5-1

Machine Start Up
Calibrate Machine
Calibrating establishes the machine reference point (absolute zero) for each axis. Absolute zero is the location on the table, usually a corner or near a corner, where the X and Y axes intersect. This value does not change. To calibrate the machine, press the Manual Mode console button. "Uncalibrated" will be in the Cal Status field.

Establishing Servo Power

Perform the following steps to establish servo power: 1. If necessary, release all Emergency Stop buttons. Twist the button in the direction indicated by the arrows to release it. 2. Press the Manual Mode console button. 3. Press the console Power On button to turn on the machine. The Power On button lights up. 4. If there is a servo or spindle error, press the Reset Servos and Spindle softkey to clear it. The Start Cycle button begins flashing. 5. Press the Start Cycle button to turn on the machine servos. The Start Cycle button stops flashing.

Axes Calibration
To calibrate all axes, follow these steps: 1. Press the Calibrate Machine softkey. The Start Cycle button begins to flash off and on. 2. Press the flashing Start Cycle button. The Axis Limit Switches field indicates the current status of the machining centers limit switches as each axis calibrates. 3. The machine position display (at the top of the text screen) shows zero (0) for all axes when the calibration process is complete.

Warm Up Machine
If the machine has been idle for an hour or more, it is recommended that the warm up cycle be run. Warming up an idle machine before part cutting improves component reliability and machine performance. You must be in Manual mode to run a warm up cycle. Follow these steps to warm up the machining center: 1. The control power must be on and the axes must be calibrated. There must not be any tool in the spindle, and the Tool in Spindle field on the Manual screen must be 0.

5 - 2 Machine Operation Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

2. Select the Warm Up Machine softkey. The Start Cycle button begins flashing. 3. Press the Start Cycle button (to cancel the warm up cycle, press any Mode console button or softkey before pressing the Start Cycle button). The axes slowly move from one end of the machine to the other. The spindle moves at a low RPM for five minutes. 4. The warm up cycle completes in 15 minutes. The Manual screen reappears and axis movement stops. Follow these steps to cancel the warm-up cycle: 1. Press the Feed Hold console button. 2. Press the Spindle Off button. 3. Press the Feed Hold button a second time, or press the Stop Cycle button.

Reset Master
To restart the control (reboot the system) without switching the power to the machine tool off and back on again, follow these steps: 1. Press the Auxiliary console button. The Auxiliary screen appears. 2. Press the More softkey. 3. Press the Reset Master softkey. The Yes and No softkeys appear. When the Yes softkey is pressed, the system will reboot. Pressing the No softkey aborts the reset process. Be sure to save any part program youre working on before resetting the master. In NC Programming, an unsaved part program will be permanently erased. In Conversational Programming, the part program will be saved, but any changes made after the last autosave will be lost.

Recovery and Restart

Restart a part program at almost any point within the program - typically, the point at which the running program was interrupted. If the Emergency Stop button was used to stop machining, machine power must be restored before restarting the program. To restart the program, follow these steps: 1. Select the console Auto button. The Start Block default is 1, and the End Block default is the last block of the program. 2. Enter the proper Start Block and, optionally, an End Block if other than the end of the program. 3. Touch the Recovery Restart softkey. 4. If the Start Block contains multiple choices for restart, then prompts are displayed to select the proper point of restart.
704-0116-115 Machine Operation Basics 5-3

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Manual Mode
Manual mode controls machine settings and operations. The top part of the screen displays the DRO. See Digital Read Out (DRO), on page 4 - 11 for more information. These are the softkeys for Manual mode: Tool Management F1Access tool information for Spindle, Auto Tools, and Manual Tools. Manual Function Setup F2 Set manual spindle speed and jog feed, retract tool, execute a manual rapid move, turn chip removal on and off, turn washdown coolant on and off, and turn worklight on and off from this screen. Diagnostics F3 Access the CE Status & Diagnostics screen and the ATC & Machine Diagnostics screen. See Manual Safety Override Mode, on page 4 61 and ATC and Machine Diagnostics, on page 5 - 11 for more information. Park Machine F4Center the table and leave the spindle at the home position. Warm Up Machine F5Warm up an idle machine. Orient Spindle F6Ensures that the Z axis is at the correct height for a tool to be inserted in the spindle. The ORIENT SPINDLE softkey will not function unless the enclosure doors are completely closed. Reset Servos and Spindle F7Activates only to enable recovery from certain types of electronic hardware faults such as overloads. Calibrate Machine F8Establish absolute zero for each axis on the machining center.

Manual Function Setup

The Digital Read Out is displayed at the top of the Manual Function screen. See Digital Read Out (DRO), on page 4 - 11. Other fields on this screen are: Manual Jog Feedenter the jog feedrate. Manual Spindle Speedenter the spindle speed. Rotary Jog Feed (rotary machines)enter the rotary feedrate.

Softkeys are: Retract Toolretracts the tool. Manual Rapid Moveaccesses the manual rapid move parameters. Chip Removal Forward On/Offturns the chip conveyor on in a forward direction. Also turns conveyor off. The Chip Conveyor continues to run when you exit the Manual screen. If you want to stop the conveyor, you must use this softkey before you exit the screen (E-stop will also stop the conveyor).

5 - 4 Machine Operation Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Chip Removal Reverse On/Offturns the chip conveyor on in a reverse direction. Also turns conveyor off. The Chip Conveyor continues to run when you exit the Manual screen. If you want to stop the conveyor, you must use this softkey before you exit the screen (E-stop will also stop the conveyor).

Washdown Coolant On/Offturns the washdown coolant on and off. Worklight On/Offturns the worklight on and off.

Manual Rapid Move

Manual Rapid Move executes a single axis rapid move to a specific position at a controlled feedrate. The operator can enter an axis position, either in machine or part coordinates, and initiate the move to that position at a specified feedrate. The DRO is displayed at the top of the screen; see Digital Read Out (DRO), on page 4 11. The Manual Rapid Move fields are: Coordinate Systemspecifies the coordinate system for the end position of the move, either Part or Machine. Manual Rapid Feedspecifies the feedrate of a linear axis move. Rotary Rapid Feedspecifies the feedrate of a rotary axis move. X / Y / Zspecifies the end position of the move in a linear axis. A / B / Cspecifies the end position of the move in a rotary axis, if equipped (fields are inactive for a non-rotary machine). More than one axis end position may be entered, but the move occurs only on the axis that is selected with the corresponding Rapid Move softkey. Softkeys are: Rapid Move Xenables the rapid move in X. Rapid Move Yenables the rapid move in Y. Rapid Move Zenables the rapid move in Z. Rapid Move Aenables the rapid move in A (softkey is inactive if the machine is not equipped with a rotary/tilt A axis). Rapid Move Benables the rapid move in B (softkey is inactive if the machine is not equipped with a rotary/tilt B axis). Rapid Move Cenables the rapid move in C (softkey is inactive if the machine is not equipped with a rotary C axis).

To perform a Manual Rapid Move: 1. In Manual mode, select the Manual Function Setup softkey. 2. Select the Manual Rapid Move softkey. The Manual Rapid Move fields are displayed. (This softkey is grayed out if the machine is not calibrated.) 3. Select Part or Machine coordinate system from the drop-down Coordinate System list.
704-0116-115 Machine Operation Basics 5-5

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

4. Set the linear axis feedrate in the Manual Rapid Feed field. Alternatively, set the rotary axis feedrate in the Rotary Rapid Feed field. 5. Specify the end position of the move in the appropriate axis field(s). 6. Select the appropriate Rapid Move softkey to enable the move. When the softkey is selected, a message is displayed that instructs the operator to press the Start Cycle button to move the axis. When the Start Cycle button is pressed, the rapid move is performed. Only one axis move can be performed at a time. During the move, all other Rapid Move softkeys are disabled until the move is completed. Once complete, another softkey can be selected, initiating the next move. The Rapid Override knob/potentiometer is active during the move.

5 - 6 Machine Operation Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Automatic Tool Changer

The ATC for HMX and VTXU machines is a random-pocket tool changer that tracks tools in the magazine using an ATC Map. All ATC operations require that the servo power is on, that the machine is calibrated, and that the ATC is at Home position. Each VMX or VM machining center is equipped with a swing-arm random pocket Automatic Tool Changer (ATC).

VM Tool Magazine
The station magazine is positioned vertically on the machine. An electronic motor and helical gear drive the magazine. When activated, the tool magazine operates as described below: 1. The requested tool pocket rotates 90 to make the tool available for the swing arm. 2. The swing arm rotates 60 to simultaneously grab the tool in the pocket and the tool in the spindle. 3. The spindle unclamps. 4. The swing arm moves down to pull the tools out of the pocket and the spindle, and then rotates 180. 5. The swing arm moves up and swaps the tools. 6. Finally, the swing arm and tool pocket return to their original positions.

Types of Automatic Tool Changers (ATC)

There are two types of ATCs, which are described in the following sections: 40-Taper ATC with 24- or 40-Station Tool Magazine 50-Taper ATC with 30- or 32-Station Tool Magazine

40-Taper ATC with 24- or 40-Station Tool Magazine

This tool changer features a magazine with either 24 or 40 tool pockets (stations). The magazine is positioned vertically on the machine. An electric motor and helical gear drive the 24- and 40-station magazine. The 24-station magazine is round and the 40-station magazine is elliptical. Refer to the previous table for the number of tool pockets (stations) available for a specific machining center.

ATC Sequence
This is the basic sequence of operation of the tool magazine, assuming the magazine is positioned to the next tool required: 1. The requested tool pocket rotates down 90 to make the tool available for the swing arm. 2. The swing arm rotates 60 to simultaneously grab both the tool in the pocket and the tool in the spindle.
Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Machine Operation Basics 5-7

3. The spindle unclamps. 4. The swing arm moves down to pull the tools out of the pocket and spindle, and then the arm rotates 180. 5. The swing arm moves up and swaps the tools. 6. The spindle clamps the new tool in the spindle and the swing arm rotates back to 0. 7. The tool pocket moves back to its original position.

Figure 51. VMX 40-Taper ATC with 24-station Tool Magazine

5 - 8 Machine Operation Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

50-Taper ATC with 30 or 32-Station Tool Magazine

The VMX50/50T uses the 50-Taper ATC with a 30-station tool magazine. The VMX64 uses the 50-Taper ATC with a 32-station tool magazine. An electric motor, two dogs (cam detents), and three proximity switches control the 50Taper tool changer motion. For the VMX64, a free-standing hydraulic unit runs the rotation of the magazine, magazine locking cylinder, and the tool pot up and down cylinder. The ATC sequence for the 50-taper ATC is the same as the 40-taper ATC sequence.

Figure 52. VMX 64/50-Taper, 32 Station ATC

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Machine Operation Basics 5-9

HMX and VTXU Tool Magazine

The ATC can be operated in Auto or Manual machine mode, using ATC Diagnostics.

HMX Machines
For HMX machines, the following steps explain the basic sequence of operation of the tool magazine, assuming the magazine is positioned to the next tool required. 1. The tool holder rotates to 90, then the ATC door opens. 2. The exchange arm rotates to 90 and simultaneously grabs the tool in the tool holder, and if present, the tool in the spindle, if the following conditions are met: The X, Y, and Z axes are at tool change position. The spindle is oriented.

3. The spindle unclamps. 4. The exchange arm moves out and simultaneously pulls the tools from the holder and the spindle, then rotates 180. 5. The exchange arm moves in and swaps the tools. 6. The exchange arm rotates to 90. 7. The ATC door closes and the tool holder simultaneously returns to its original position.

VTXU Machines
The following steps describe the basic sequence of operation of the tool magazine in the VTXU magazine, assuming the magazine is positioned to the next tool required. 1. The ATC door opens if the following conditions are met: The X and Y axes are at tool change position. The Z axis is at Height (refer to ATC and Machine Diagnostics, on page 5 11 for more information). The spindle is oriented.

2. The tool pocket rotates from the Up position to the Down position. 3. The swing arm rotates 90 and simultaneously grabs the tool in the tool pocket and, if present, the tool in the spindle. 4. The spindle unclamps. 5. The swing arm moves up and swaps the tools, then rotates 180. 6. The swing arm and tool pocket return to the original positions. 7. The ATC door closes.

5 - 10 Machine Operation Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

ATC and Machine Diagnostics

The HMX machines have separate screens for Machine Diagnostics and ATC Diagnostics. The VM, VMX, and VTXU machines have a single combined ATC & Machine Diagnostics screen.

HMX Machine Diagnostics

Follow these steps to display the Machine Diagnostic screen for the HMX machine: 1. Press the MACHINE MODE MANUAL console key. 2. Select the DIAGNOSTIC softkey. 3. Select the MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS softkey.

Figure 53. Machine Diagnostics Screen for HMX Machine

These are the status fields on the Machine Diagnostics screen for an HMX machine: Spindle Statusindicates if the Spindle is Oriented or Not Oriented, and clamped or unclamped. Oriented is required for ATC to begin. Tool in Spindleindicates the tool number in the Spindle. ATC Statusindicates if ATC is in Home position. Home is required for ATC to begin. Home is defined as ATC Door closed, Exchange Arm at 0, Tool Holder at 0, and Magazine In Pos (1). Air Pressureindicates Pressure OK or Low Pressure. Pressure OK is required to begin an ATC operation. Way Lube Levelindicates Level OK or Low Level. A Low Level alarm will not allow programs to start running. Coolant Statusindicates Level OK and Filter OK. Both are required for tool coolant operation. Available with the Coolant Through Spindle (CTS) option. Hydraulic Statusindicates No Alarm or Alarm. An alarm will not allow programs to start running.
704-0116-115 Machine Operation Basics 5-11

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Spindle Chillerindicates No Alarm or Alarm. No Alarm is required to begin an ATC operation. Overload Statusindicates Tripped or Not Tripped. Not Tripped is required to operate the machine.

HMX ATC Diagnostics

Display the ATC Diagnostics screen for the HMX machine by following these steps: 1. Press the MACHINE MODE MANUAL console key. 2. Select the DIAGNOSTIC softkey. 3. Select the ATC DIAGNOSTICS softkey.

Figure 54. HMX ATC Diagnostics Screen, Status Condition Fields

HMX ATC Status Conditions

These are the status condition fields that appear on the ATC DIAGNOSTICS screen. Green indicators next to fields identify when the status is in the home position. Spindle Statusindicates if the Spindle is Oriented or Not Oriented, and clamped or unclamped. Oriented is required for ATC to begin. Tool in Spindleindicates the tool number in the Spindle. ATC Axis Positionsindicates At X, At Y, and At Z positions. All three are required for ATC to begin. Z-Axis Positionindicates At Zero position. Magazine Positionindicates the current magazine position (note that this may not be the tool number). ATC Statusindicates if ATC is in Home position. Home is required for ATC to begin. Home is defined as ATC Door closed, Exchange Arm at 0, Tool Holder at 0, and Magazine In Pos (1). Tool Holderindicates 0 or 90 position. 0 is required for ATC Status
704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

5 - 12 Machine Operation Basics

Home. Exchange Armindicates 0 or 90 position. 0 is required for ATC Status Home. ATC Doorindicates Closed or Open position. Closed is required for ATC Status Home. Magazine Statusindicates the current magazine position (note that this may not be the tool number). ATC OK to Stopindicates if the ATC is at a position where it can stop. Start Pushbuttonindicates ON when start button is depressed, OFF when it is not. Spindle Unclamp PBindicates ON when spindle unclamp button is depressed, OFF when it is not. Hydraulic Statusindicates No Alarm or Alarm. No Alarm is required to begin an ATC operation.

HMX ATC Diagnostics Softkeys

When all requirements for a softkey action are met, a prompt displays and the Start Cycle lamp flashes. Pressing the Start Cycle button executes the command. The Start Cycle lamp stops flashing during the execution of the command and is turned off when the command is completed. Selecting another softkey before pressing the Start Cycle button cancels the pending command and causes the Start Cycle lamp to cease flashing. If the requirements for a softkey action are not met, a message displays indicating why the action cannot be commanded. Orient Spindlesets the command to orient the spindle. Oriented is required to begin an ATC cycle. ATC Door Open/Close sets the command to open or close the ATC Door. Each press of the softkey switches command between open and close. Must be Closed for ATC to begin. Tool Holder 0/90sets the command to move the Tool Holder to 0 or 90. Each press of the softkey switches command between 0 and 90. Exchange Arm 0 / 90sets the command to move the Exchange Arm to 0 or 90. Tool Holder must be at 90, and ATC Door Open. Once rotated to 90, the Exchange Arm must be rotated to 180 or jogged back to 0. Spindle Clamp/Unclampsets the command to clamp or unclamp the spindle. Each press of the softkey switches the command between clamp and unclamp. Exchange Arm 180sets the command to move the Exchange Arm out, rotate 180 and in. Tool Holder must be at 90 and ATC Door Open. Must be at 0 for ATC to begin. Move Axes to TC Positionsets the command to move all required axes to the ATC position. Move Z-Axis to Zerosets the command to move the Z-axis to the Zero position.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Machine Operation Basics 5-13

Magazine CWsets the command to move the magazine clockwise one position. Magazine CCWsets the command to move the magazine counterclockwise one position. Calibrate T/C Magazinesets the command to calibrate the magazine. The magazine will rotate to the Reference Pos.

VM, VMX, and VTXU ATC & Machine Diagnostics

Display the ATC & Machine Diagnostics screen for these machines by following these steps: 1. Press the MACHINE MODE MANUAL console key. 2. Select the DIAGNOSTIC softkey. 3. Select the ATC & MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS softkey.

Figure 55. ATC & Machine Diagnostics Screen, Page 1

5 - 14 Machine Operation Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

ATC & Machine Diagnostics Input Fields

The following descriptions are for the status of inputs for the ATC for VM, VMX, and VTXU machines. Spindle Statusindicates if the Spindle is Oriented or Not Oriented. Oriented is required for ATC to begin. Spindle Clampindicates if the Spindle is clamped or unclamped. ATC Z Axis Positionindicates Z is at Machine Tool Change Height. ATC Position (VTXU only)indicates Z At Height and X/Y At Position. ATC Statusindicates if ATC is in Home position. Home is required for ATC to begin. Home is defined as ATC Door closed (VTXU), Exchange Arm at 0, Tool Holder at UP, and Magazine In Pos #1. ATC Door Status (VTXU only)Indicates the status of the ATC door on the VTXU machine. Tool Holderindicates Up or Down position. Up is required for ATC Status Home. Exchange Armindicates 0 or 60 position. 0 is required for ATC Status Home. Cannot move from 0 to 60 unless Z-axis is at Tool Change Height, Tool Pocket is Down, Spindle is Oriented and Clamped. Cannot move from 60 to 0 unless Z-axis is at Tool Change Height, Tool Pocket is Down, and Spindle is Clamped.

Magazine Lockindicates Locked or Unlocked Position. Locked is required for ATC to begin. Magazine Statusindicates the current magazine position (note that this may not be the tool number). Magazine In Positionindicates In Pos (1) or In Pos (2). In Pos (1) is required for ATC Status Home. In Pos (2) is active when magazine is rotating and not in position.

Magazine Referenceindicates Reference Pos when the ATC calibration sensor is detected. ATC OK to Stopindicates Off or On. On is set during Load Arm rotation and disables the Load Arm motor and enables the brake. Off should be set when Load Arm is at 0 degrees or 60 degrees. Start Pushbuttonindicates Off or On. On is displayed when the Start Cycle button is pressed. Spindle Unclamp PBindicates Off or On. On is displayed when the Spindle Unclamp button is pressed. Way Lube Levelindicates OK or Low Level. A Low Level alarm will not allow programs to start running. Air Pressureindicates OK or Low Pressure. OK is required to begin an ATC operation.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Machine Operation Basics 5-15

VM, VMX, and VTXU ATC & Machine Diagnostics Softkeys

When all requirements for a softkey action are met, a prompt displays and the Start Cycle lamp flashes. Pressing the Start Cycle button executes the command. The Start Cycle lamp stops flashing during the execution of the command and is turned off when the command is completed. Selecting another softkey before pressing the Start Cycle button cancels the pending command and causes the Start Cycle lamp to cease flashing. If the requirements for a softkey action are not met, a message displays indicating why the action cannot be commanded. The ATC & Machine Diagnostics softkeys are listed below; some softkeys may not be present on all machines or may appear in a different order: Orient Spindlesets the command to orient the spindle. Oriented is required to begin an ATC cycle. Tool Holder Up / Downsets the command to move the Tool Holder Down or Up. Each press of the softkey switches command between Down and Up. Exchange Arm 0 / 60 (90 for VTXU)sets the command to move the Load Arm to 0 or 60 (90). Tool Pocket must be Z-axis at Tool Change Height, Spindle Clamped, and Oriented Down before moving to 60 (90). Each press of the softkey switches command between 0 and 60 (90). Spindle Clamp / Unclampsets the command to clamp or unclamp the spindle. Each press of the softkey switches the command between clamp and unclamp. Exchange Arm Rotatesets the command to move the Exchange Arm down, rotate 180 and up. Tool Pocket must be Down, Load Arm must be at 60, and spindle must be unclamped. Move Z-Axis to T/C Heightsets the command to move the Z-axis to the Tool Change Height position. Z-axis must be At Height for ATC to begin. Move Z-Axis to Zerosets the command to move the Z-axis to the Zero position. Magazine Pin Lock / Unlocksets the command to lock or unlock the magazine pin. Locked is required for ATC to begin. Magazine CWsets the command to move the magazine clockwise one position. Magazine CCWsets the command to move the magazine counterclockwise one position. Calibrate T/C Magazinesets the command to calibrate the magazine. Magazine will rotate to the Reference Pos. Exchange Arm Jog Reversesets the command to pulse jog the exchange arm in the reverse direction. Pulse commands will stop once the Exchange Arm is at 0 degree. ATC Door Open / Close (VTXU only)sets the command to open or close the ATC Door on the VTXU machine. Each press of the softkey switches command between open and close. Must be Closed for ATC to begin. Move Axes to T/C Positionsets the command to move all required axes to the ATC position.

5 - 16 Machine Operation Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

HMX Automatic Pallet Changer

The Automatic Pallet Changer (APC) system is standard on HMX machining centers. Equipped with two pallets, the APC provides the ability to set up a part on one pallet while a part is being machined on the other pallet. The B-axis must be squared before any operation can occur. Refer to Squaring the Pallet, on page 5 - 17 for instructions for squaring the APC table. This is the basic sequence of operation of the APC: 1. The APC Pin unlocks. 2. The APC table raises and rotates 180. Hydraulic solenoids ensure the table rotates in the proper direction. The APC table does not rotate through 360, but rotates in the opposite direction to return to its previous position. 3. The APC table lowers into position. 4. The APC Pin locks. Only a Hurco-certified Service Engineer can make adjustments to the APC Table.

Squaring the Pallet

The pallet is not automatically squared during machine calibration. It must be squared before it can be used. Follow these steps to square the pallet: 1. Press the MACHINE MODE MANUAL console key. 2. Select the Diagnostics softkey. 3. Select the Pallet Changer Diagnostics softkey to access the APC Diagnostics screen. 4. Select the More softkey to access the second APC Diagnostic screen. 5. Select the Move Z-axis to APC Position softkey to position the Z-axis at the APC position. The APC table must be in the down position to move the Z-axis to the APC position. 6. Select the Square Pallet For Rotation softkey and press the Cycle Start button. The pallet will rotate into the proper position for the pallet exchange cycle. If the B-axis is away from the squared position, selecting the Square Pallet For Rotation softkey rotates the table at the maximum RPM back to the squared location.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Machine Operation Basics 5-17

Operating the APC

The APC can be operated in Auto mode within a Conversational or NC part program. Follow these steps to operate the APC in a Conversational program: 1. On any Conversational part programming data block, select the MISCELLANEOUS softkey. 2. Select the MACHINE FUNCTION softkey to display the Machine Function screen. 3. Select the SHOW M CODE LIST pop-up box to display the M Code List. The following M Codes are used to operate the APC (use the scroll bar to view more M codes, if necessary): M51 Cycle Pallet Changerrequires confirmation from the Operator before an pallet change cycle is initiated (see details below). M56 Cycle APC w/o Notifycomplete a pallet change cycle without confirmation from the Operator. M57 Cycle to Pallet #1place Pallet 1 in the machine without confirmation from the Operator. M58 Cycle to Pallet #2place Pallet 2 in the machine without confirmation from the Operator.

Figure 56. Machine Function Screen with M Code List

Using M51 does not require indicating whether Pallet 1 or 2 is in the machining setup area. Before M51 will initiate the APC cycle, the front enclosure doors must be closed and the APC Ready pushbutton pressed. If the front enclosure doors are open when the M51 operation is requested, the program will be in a Feed Hold state and a message to close the front enclosure doors will be displayed. Close the doors and press the APC Ready pushbutton to continue the part program.

5 - 18 Machine Operation Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

If the APC Ready pushbutton has not been pressed when the M51 operation is requested, the program will be in a Feed Hold state with the following message displayed, Pallet setup confirmation required to cycle pallet changer. Press the APC Ready and Cycle Start pushbuttons on the APC Panel to continue the program. Pressing Feed Hold during a pallet change cycle will stop the cycle. Releasing Feed Hold will resume the cycle. However, Feed Hold followed by Spindle Off (or the Stop Cycle button) during a pallet change cycle will abort the program and the pallet change cycle. The APC must be returned to the home position using the Pallet Changer Diagnostics before an Auto program can be run again.

Refer to the NC Programming Manual for instructions on operating the APC within an NC program.

APC Diagnostics
Follow these steps to access the APC Diagnostics screen: 1. Press the MACHINE MODE MANUAL console key. 2. Select the DIAGNOSTICS softkey. 3. Select the PALLET CHANGER DIAGNOSTICS softkey. The APC Diagnostics screen 1 opens:

APC Diagnostics Screen 1

APC Diagnostics Screen 2

Figure 57. APC Diagnostics Screens 1 and 2

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Machine Operation Basics 5-19

APC Status Conditions

The APC Diagnostics screen displays the status of inputs for the APC system. APC Positionindicates whether APC table is in the Up or Down position. Pallet in Machineindicates whether the APC table Position 1 or 2 is in the machining area. APC Clamp Statusindicates if the APC table is clamped or unclamped. Pallet Status in Machineindicates Pallet Squared/Not Squared. Pallet must be squared to begin an APC cycle. Z-Axis Positionindicates if the Z-axis is At Zero (calibration point), APC position, or neither. Must be At APC position to begin an APC cycle. B-Axis Statusindicates if the B-axis is Clamped or Unclamped. Pallet Reference Positionindicates whether the pallet is in the correct orientation. Pallet must be in the correct orientation before engaging the pallet pin. The Manual Table Release Lever must be at Reference Pos to begin an APC cycle. Pallet Pinindicates whether the APC Pin is Locked or Unlocked. The operator uses the Manual Table Release Lever to engage/disengage the pallet pin. The pallet pin must be engaged to allow and APC cycle. APC Door Statusindicates if the APC door is Open and Unlocked, Closed and Unlocked, or Closed and Locked. Hydraulic Statusindicates either Alarm or No Alarm. Status must be No Alarm to begin an APC cycle. ATC Statusindicates if the ATC table is Home or Not Home. Must be Home to begin APC cycle.

APC Diagnostics Softkeys

The APC Diagnostic softkeys are functional only when Servo Power is On and the machine is calibrated. These are the APC Diagnostic softkeys. Cycle Pallet Changersets the command to complete a full rotation of the APC Table. This function will perform a full APC cycle. The Z-axis will move to the APC position, the B-axis will square, the APC table will raise, the APC table will rotate 180 degrees, and will then lower. Raise Pallet Changersets the command to lift the APC Table to the Up position. The B-axis must be squared and the Z-axis must be at the APC position. Rotate APC to Position 1sets the command to rotate the APC table to Position 1 inside the machining area. The B-axis must be squared and the APC must be in the raised position, and Position 1 must not be in the machining area. Rotate APC to Position 2sets the command to rotate the APC table to Position 2 inside the machining area. The B-axis must be squared and the APC must be in the raised position, and Position 2 must not be in the machining area. Lower Pallet Changersets the command to lower the APC table to the Down position. The Z-axis must be in the APC position.
704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

5 - 20 Machine Operation Basics

Moreopens the second APC Diagnostics screen. Move Z-Axis to APC Positionsets the command to move the Z-axis to the APC position. The APC table must be in the down position to move the Z-axis to the APC position. Square Pallet for Rotationsets the command to square the pallet. Enable APC Jog Modeallows the operator to jog the APC table up and down and also jog the APC table 180 degrees. When selected, a message displays indicating to proceed with caution:

This message is displayed until the APC Diagnostics screens are exited or until an E-stop occurs.

APC Jog Mode

The operator should verify the position of the Z-axis before jogging the APC. From APC screen 1, the operator can select Raise Pallet Changer, Lower Pallet Changer, Rotate APC to Position 1, or Rotate APC to Position 2. Once a function has been selected, the green Start Cycle button flashes and a message is displayed:

Figure 58. APC Diagnostic screen 1 with APC Jog Mode messages

The operator can then press and hold the green Start Cycle button to jog the APC. The operator must hold the Start Cycle button down while jogging. Once the Start Cycle button is released, the jogging function stops. The operator must select a softkey function again to enable the jogging.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Machine Operation Basics 5-21

Once selected, the APC Jog Mode remains enabled until the operator navigates away from the APC diagnostic screens or an E-stop occurs When all requirements for a softkey action are met, a prompt displays and the Start Cycle lamp flashes. Pressing the Start Cycle button executes the command. The Start Cycle lamp stops flashing during execution of the command and is turned off when the command is completed. Selecting another softkey before pressing the Start Cycle button cancels the pending command. If requirements for a softkey action are not met, a message displays indicating why the action cannot be commanded.

Operating the APC from the Load Station

The APC Panel, shown in the figure below, is located on the front of the machine enclosure, below the front enclosure doors. The APC Panel is used to operate the APC table.

Alarm Lamp

Cycle Start

Cancel Cycle

APC Ready

Manual Cycle APC

Water Gun

Figure 59. APC Panel

APC Panel Pushbuttons

These are the APC Panel pushbuttons, from left to right: Emergency Stopdisables all axis servo drives and stops all moves of the pallet changer. Cycle Startinitiates the APC to cycle in Auto mode. The Cycle Start pushbutton flashes while the operation is pending, is steady when the operation is in process, and turns off when the operation is completed. Cancel Cyclecancels any pending operation (if the Cycle Start lamp is
704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

5 - 22 Machine Operation Basics

flashing, it will turn off). Pressing the Cycle Start pushbutton after an operation is cancelled by the Cycle Stop pushbutton results in no APC motion. This pushbutton does not stop the APC once it has started its cycle. APC Readyreadies the APC for a pallet change. The APC doors must be closed and locked. When pressed, the Cycle Start pushbutton flashes to begin the operation. This pushbutton is used when confirmation is required. The consoles Start Cycle pushbutton flashes when the Hydraulic Lift, APC Table Rotate to Position 1, or APC Table Rotate to Position 2 pushbutton is illuminated and the Cycle Start pushbutton is flashing. Pressing the consoles Stop Cycle pushbutton cancels the operation. Manual Cycle APCsets the command to complete a full rotation of the APC Table (this pushbutton corresponds to the Cycle Pallet Changer softkey on the APC Diagnostics screen.) This pushbutton is used only in manual or diagnostic mode.

Manual APC Table Rotation

Near the front of the APC table is a Manual Table Release Lever. This lever provides the input for the APC Pin Lock. To manually rotate the table without using the remote APC Panel, pull the Release Lever out. This allows the APC table to be rotated by hand for part setup. After rotating the APC table, the arrows on the pallet must be aligned with the arrows on the APC tables platform before executing a pallet exchange. The APC table must be in Down position before using the Manual Table Release Lever to manually rotate the table. Failure to align arrows prior to executing a pallet exchange can result in the APC table not positioning correctly in the machining area.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Machine Operation Basics 5-23

Dual-Zone Machining
Dual-zone machining provides the ability to set up a job in one zone while machining in the other zone. To use both zones on a dual-zone capable machine, the Enable Dual Zones parameter must be set to enable dual zones. This is done in Machine Parameters: 1. Select the Auxilary console key. 2. Select the Utility Screen icon. 3. Select the User Preferences softkey. 4. Select the Machine Parameters softkey. The Enable Dual Zones parameter is listed on Page 1 of Machine Parameters. Set this parameter to 1 to enable dual zones (1 is the default setting). When this parameter is set to 0, the machine can be used as a single long bed vertical machine. The zone partition must be removed to use as a single long bed vertical machine. See Figure 32. Machine Parameters, Page 1, on page 3 - 11 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information about the Enable Dual Zones parameter.

Part Programming for Dual-Zones

Each zone has its own coordinate system, so a Change Part Setup data block is used to modify the coordinates for each zone. This Change Part Setup block is used to switch zones while running a program. At the beginning of the program and at each point where a zone change is required, insert a Change Part Setup block: 1. From the Input screen select Part Programming, the Insert Block Before softkey, the Miscellaneous softkey, and the Change Part Setup softkey. A Change Part Setup block is added. 2. Modify Part Zero X, Y, Z (Part Zero Z is available only if using Absolute Tool Length mode) for the zone. 3. Modify Offset Z (if using Zero Calibration mode only) for the zone. 4. Specify the zone the part setup applies to in the Zone field. 1 = Zone 1 (the left-side zone when facing the machine). 2 = Zone 2 (the right-side zone when facing the machine). 0 = the current zone. Zone 0 can be used when dual zones are enabled but you do not need to run the program in a particular zone. Setting the Zone field to 0 will run the program in the zone that the spindle currently occupies. Zone field is not displayed in single long bed configuration.

5 - 24 Machine Operation Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Viewing Graphics
Graphics can be displayed in one or both zones: 1. Press the Draw console key to display the Graphics screen. 2. Select the Select View softkey. Select the All Views softkey. 3. Select the Select Zone softkey. 4. Select Zone 1, Zone 2, or All Zones. The zone setting must match the zone of the program (or be set to All Zones) to view the part program in Graphics. The zone is displayed in the lower left corner of the graphics display:

Figure 510. Isometric view of parts in both zones

Dual-Zone Operation
Programs can be run in one zone while the other zone is accessible to the operator for set up or other functions.

Setup Confirmation
Each zone door is equipped with a green Zone Setup Confirmation button and a red Emergency Stop button:

Emergency Stop Button

Confirmation Button

Figure 511. Emergency Stop and Zone Confirmation buttons

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Machine Operation Basics 5-25

The green Zone Setup Confirmation button must be pressed to confirm that the zone is ready before the spindle will move into the zone to start machining. The red Emergency Stop button will stop all machine operation when pressed.

Running Programs
To run a program, press the Cycle Start button. A pop-up confirmation message appears, and the green Zone Setup Confirmation button flashes on the door of the zone where the program will run. Push the green flashing button to confirm setup. If the spindle head is in the current zone for program, no confirmation is required. While the program is running, you are able to set up in the other zone. When the door to the second zone is closed and the program completes its run in the first zone, the green Zone Setup Confirmation button on the second zone door flashes. Press it to start machining in the that zone. In dual-zone configuration, the door of the opposite zone can be opened until the green Zone Setup Confirmation button is pressed. The door must be closed before the confirmation will be accepted and the door locked. To unlock the door while the spindle head is in the opposite zone, press the green Zone Setup Confirmation button to cancel confirmation. With CE enabled the door will not open when the green Zone Setup Confirmation button is lit.

5 - 26 Machine Operation Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Auto Mode
Programs are run in Auto Mode. Press the Auto button on the console to access Auto Mode to check for errors, compute estimated run time, recovery/restart, perform a dry run, or run a part program.

Figure 512. Auto Mode screen

Fields are: Part Program Pathdisplays the part programs directory path. Part Program Namedisplays the name of the current part program. Start Blockspecifies the first block that will be run; defaults to 1. If you want to execute only a certain portion of the conversational part program, the Start and End Block fields may be changed. End Blockspecifies the last block that will be run; defaults to the last block number in the program. If you want to execute only a certain portion of the conversational part program, the Start and End Block fields may be changed.

The following softkeys are available in Auto Mode: Use Editing Fileselects the active program file to run. If this softkey is not selected, WinMax defaults to the last program run. If the last program run does not match the program that is being edited (as indicated in status bar), the operator will be prompted to select which program to run. Feed & Speed Optimizationfine tunes program execution, using the Axis Feed Rate and Spindle Speed dials to adjust values. This softkey is disabled in Test Mode.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Machine Operation Basics 5-27

Check for Errorschecks the program from the Start Block through the End Block and displays error status. The number of the data block containing the error is included in the error message. The time required for error checking depends upon the programs length and complexity. Select the Abort Operation softkey to stop error checking at any time.

Compute Estimated Run Timeprovides an estimate of time it takes to run the program. Select the Abort Operation softkey to stop computing estimated run time. Error checking automatically occurs during Compute Estimated Run Time.

Recovery Restartrestarts a conversational or NC part program; typically the point at which the program was interrupted. This softkey is disabled in Test Mode. For Conversational Programsif necessary, Conversational Start and End blocks can be changed from the default. For Mill Contour data blocks: Recovery Restart only occurs at segment 0 of a Mill Contour data block, not at a segment within a data block. For Pattern data blocks: when Recovery Restart begins at the first block of a pattern, all instances of the pattern are run. If Recovery Restart begins at a block within the pattern, WinMax prompts the user to specify which instance to restart at, and then requests any additional restart information for the start block. For NC Programsuse the following softkeys to restart an NC program after it was aborted either by the machine or the operator. Preparatory functions such as coolant, feeds and speeds, and offsets will be executed before machining resumes, and Tool Vector input is checked. Set Restart Markermanually sets the restart marker. An R will appear to the left of the block selected, and will clear if the program successfully runs. Auto Set Restart Markerautomatically marks the last block being executed when the program was stopped, or where an error occurred during error checking. Reset Restart Markerclears the Restart Marker and cancels the Recovery Restart operation. Can be used on a block after a G41/G42. Set End Markerindicates the block that system should use to end program verification and execution. An E is inserted to the left of the block. Reset End Markerrestores end marker to its default position at the end of the program.

Dry Runactive in Test Run mode only, performs a program test run to identify potential problems before cutting the part. Specify all or a portion of the part program that will be tested in the Start and End blocks. Trace the tool over the part at the programmed minimum Z level with the Spindle Off. Peck cycles and roughing passes are skipped.

5 - 28 Machine Operation Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

If the Z-Start value is set below the stock surface, the minimum Z value must be programmed so the tool does not plunge into the part. Run Programinitiates program execution and displays monitoring information. This softkey is disabled in Test Mode. When the softkey is selected, the program is buffered and the Start Cycle button flashes. Pressing the Start Cycle button starts the program run. If the machine is not calibrated, the Manual screen immediately displays. When the program is complete, the message Program is complete. Press Start Cycle to run program again appears. Press Cycle Start button to run again. Changes made to a program while it is running take effect when the Start Cycle button is pressed again.

Auto Mode Monitoring

The Auto Mode Monitoring screen appears when the RUN PROGRAM softkey is selected and program execution begins. The upper part of the screen displays the DRO. See Digital Read Out (DRO), on page 4 - 11 for more information. The lower area of the screen displays the Spindle Load Monitor, the data block executed, the type of operation, and the part count. For NC programs, five lines of NC code are shown; to view more NC code as the program runs, select the NC MONITOR softkey. The bottom portion of the screen is reserved for program status and error messages. These are the fields on the Auto Mode Monitoring screen: Zone (dual-zone machines only)displays the current zone. Machine and Part Axesdisplays the current position of all axes. Opt Stop On (Off)displays the status (on or off) of the Optional Stop for NC programs. Chip Removaldisplays the status of the chip auger. Tool in Spindledisplays the tool number of the tool in the spindle. Spindledisplays the current spindle speed. Feeddisplays the current feed rate. Program Run Timedisplays the time the program has been running. F(%)displays the current Feedrate per Minute percentage set on the axis Feed Rate knob. R(%)displays the current Rapid Traverse Feedrate percentage set on the Rapid override knob. S(%)displays the current spindle RPM percentage set on the Spindle Speed override knob. Axis Limit Switchesdisplays the status of the machines limit switches as each axis calibrates. Spindle Load Monitordisplays the percentage of full load on each axis as the program runs. The load is displayed in a bar graph format, with colors progressing from green to yellow to red to indicate the percentage of load from 0 to 150%.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Machine Operation Basics 5-29

Blockdisplays the current program block. Part Countdisplays the number of times the program was executed. This field can be edited by selecting the Reset Part Count softkey. A pop-up window opens, where the part count value can be changed or reset to zero.

Spindle Load Monitor

5 lines of NC code

Figure 513. Auto Mode Monitoring screen

These are the monitoring softkeys that may be available for Auto Mode Monitoring: Reset Part CountPart Count is the number of times a program was executed. To return this value to zero when a new program starts, select the Reset Part Count softkey. A pop-up window opens, where the part count value can be changed or reset to zero. Access to the part counter is locked out by Edit Lockout Level Full, set in User Interface Settings. See Edit Lockout, on page 3 4 for information. Chip Removal Forward On/Off turn the chip auger in the forward (clockwise) direction on or off. This selection is saved when the Interrupt button is pressed or after the program has finished running. If a stop condition or mode change is made before restarting a new part program or exiting the interrupt cycle, the saved information is cleared. This softkey is only available if your machining center uses a chip auger. Optional Stop On/Offpauses the program and shuts off the spindle. For NC programs, when Optional Stop is On, the M01 code in the NC program will be processed; when Optional Stop is Off, the M01 code is ignored. Select DROchange the size of the digital read out (DRO) on the screen. From the Select DRO screen you can see machine information displayed in either Full Status or Full DRO. Full Status displays the current location of machine and part axes, as well as other machine information. Full DRO displays the current location of machine and part axes, Distance to Go and other machine information (with abbreviated categories). The current zone is

5 - 30 Machine Operation Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

also displayed (dual-zone machines only). Coolant Washdown On/Offturn the coolant washdown on or off for washing chips from the enclosure. NC Monitordisplays a pop-up window containing the current NC code. This feature allows you to view the code as the program runs; the program name appears in the Current Program Name box at the bottom of the monitor. The line of code that is currently being machined is identified in red. When the Show Modals boxed is checked, the current active modals are shown. As machining progresses, the monitor will scroll through the lines of code. Select the Close button at the bottom of the window to close the NC Monitor. Toggle Rapid Override Enableenable or disable the ability to override the programmed rapid traverse using the Rapid Override console knob. Worklight On/Offturn the enclosure worklight on or off. This softkey is only available if your machining center is equipped with an enclosure worklight.

Stop Machine Operation

There are three methods to stop machine operation without turning off the power: Emergency Stop Park machine Control Power Off Timer parameter The methods described here stop machine operation, but do not shutdown the control. See Shutdown Control, on page 5 - 33 for more information about shutting down the control. If the machine will not be used for several days, or the shop has power surges or blackouts, turn off machine power at the main power switch, after stopping machine motion and shutting down the control.

Emergency Stop
To shut down the machining center quickly, press the Emergency Stop button. All motion stops and power is shut off to the spindle, relay control, way lubrication pumps, and servo systems. Do not use Emergency Stop shut down if the machine has a long table with heavy equipment attached to one end. Instead, park the machine so that the weight of the table and any attached equipment will be evenly distributed. Before hitting the Emergency Stop button, park the machine or center the table.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Machine Operation Basics 5-31

When the Emergency Stop button is pressed, a special error file is created and saved to the machine hard drive in a folder called NavESTOP. These files record the machine conditions at the time the Emergency Stop button is pressed. These files can be retrieved when necessary for service purposes; refer to Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files, on page 3 - 41 for more information.

Park Machine
Parking the machine centers the table and places the spindle at the home position. Table and attached equipment weight is distributed evenly when the machine is parked. Before parking the machine, the servo power must be on, the machine must be calibrated and the Tool in Spindle must be 0. Follow this procedure to park the machine: 1. Press the Manual Mode console button. 2. Select the PARK MACHINE softkey. The Start Cycle button flashes. 3. Press the Start Cycle button. The machine moves to its park position. 4. A message with instructions to return to the power-up condition is displayed.

Control Power Off Timer

Set the Control Power Off Timer on the Machine Parameters screen. All motion stops and power is shut off to the spindle, relay control, way lubrication pumps, and servo systems. Where can we go from here? To restart the machine after the Emergency Stop was pressed, follow this sequence: 1. Twist the Emergency Stop button to release it. 2. Press the Manual Machine Mode button. 3. Press the Power On button. Or... 4. Press the Start Cycle button.

To restart the machine after it was parked, follow this sequence: 1. Press the Manual Machine Mode button. 2. Press the Power On button. Or... 3. Press the Start Cycle button.

If machine will not be used for several days or power surges and blackouts are common, switch off the machines power. After restarting, calibrate and warm up the machine.

5 - 32 Machine Operation Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Restart Control
The Restart Control command will remove control power, complete an orderly shutdown of the WinMax Mill control, and then restart. Follow these steps to use the Restart Control command: 1. Press the Aux/Menu key followed by the Utility Screen softkey to access the Utilities screen and softkey menu. 2. From the Utilities screen, select the Restart Control softkey to access the Restart Control command. A pop-up message appears: Do you really want to restart the control? 3. Select Yes or No. When Yes is selected, the Restart Control command is performed. This feature saves time and avoids having to shut down the entire machine when it is only necessary to restart the control.

Shutdown Control
The Shutdown Control command will remove control power and complete an orderly shutdown of the WinMax control. Hurco recommends using the Shutdown Control command prior to turning off machine power to ensure that no data is lost. 1. Follow these steps to use the Shutdown Control command: 2. Press the Aux/Menu key followed by the Utility Screen softkey to access the Utilities screen and softkey menu. 3. From the Utilities screen, select the Shutdown Control softkey to access the Shutdown Control command. A pop-up message appears: Do you really want to shut down the control? 4. Select Yes or No. When Yes is selected, the Shutdown Control command is performed. 5. Wait for the shutdown process to finish before shutting off machine power at the Main Disconnect switch.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Machine Operation Basics 5-33

5 - 34 Machine Operation Basics

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

RECORD OF CHANGES
04-0116-115 rB, Nov 2012 Revised by: H.Arle Approved by: D.Skrzypczak, Nov 2012 Changes Updates to reflect software changes, including: new fields in Conversational Settings updates to Import NC States screen

04-0116-115 rA, Aug 2012 Revised by: H.Arle Approved by: D.Skrzypczak, Aug 2012 Changes Updates to reflect software changes, including: updates to Graphics settings new Tool Life Monitoring feature Drill Dwell default value updates to Program Edit Lockout functionality Diameter in Tool Probing Toggle single- and dual-screen in WinMax Desktop Absolute Tool Length mode default

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Record of Changes 1

04-0116-110 rL, July 2012 Revised by: H.Arle Approved by: D.Skrzypczak, July 2012 Changes Updates to reflect software changes, including: several new Program Parameters updates to APC screen on horizontal milling machines new Edit Lockout feature Tool Cal Length editable field Part Setup Shift Offsets new Optional Stop softkey

04-0116-110 rK, June 2012 Revised by: H.Arle Approved by: D.Skrzypczak, June 2012 Changes Updates to reflect software changes.

04-0116-110 rJ, December 2011 Revised by: H.Arle Approved by: D.Skrzypczak, December 2011 Changes Updates to reflect software changes.

04-0116-110 rI, October 2011 Revised by: H.Arle Approved by: D.Skrzypczak, October 2011 Changes Added Edit Program Lockout feature. Other updates to reflect software changes.

- 2 Record of Changes

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

04-0116-110 rH, August 2011 Revised by: H.Arle Approved by: D.Skrzypczak, August 2011 Changes Added Plunge Outside Pocket parameter. Added Language Quick Toggle feature. Other updates to reflect software changes.

704-0116-110rG, June 2011 Revised by: H. Arle Approved by: D. Skrzypczak, June 2011 Changes Updates to reflect software changes.

704-0116-110rF, December 2010 Revised by: H. Arle Approved by: D. Skrzypczak, December 2010 Changes Updates to reflect software changes.

704-0116-110rE, October 2010 Revised by: H. Arle Approved by: D. Skrzypczak, October 2010 Changes Added Enable Button section. Updates to reflect software changes.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Record of Changes -3

704-0116-110rD, August 2010 Revised by: H. Arle Approved by: D. Skrzypczak, August 2010 Changes Updates to reflect software changes.

704-0116-110rC, May 2010 Revised by: H. Arle Approved by: D. Skrzypczak, May 2010 Changes Added Dual-Zone Machining section Added LCD Remote Jog Unit section. Updates to reflect software changes.

704-0116-110rB, February 2010 Revised by: H. Arle Approved by: D. Skrzypczak, February 2010 Changes Updates to reflect software changes.

704-0116-110rA, December 2009 Revised by: H. Arle Approved by: D. Skrzypczak, December 2009 Changes Added Tool Change Optimization content. Added Manual Rapid Move content. Revisions to Absolute Tool section. Updates to reflect software changes from v7.3.

- 4 Record of Changes

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

INDEX
Numerics
10-base T 1 - 27 24-station 5 - 8

A
A Centerline X/Y/ Z field 4 - 9 A Offset softkey 4 - 57 Abort Port Operation softkey, Serial I/O screen 3 - 39 Absolute Tool Length mode 4 - 17 ACCELERATED DRAW F2 softkey, graphics screen 4 - 66 access code 4 - 63 changing 4 - 63 Active Error Listing 3 - 39 Active Status Listing 3 - 40 Add As Manual Tool softkey Tool Review screen 4 - 37 Unmatched Tools Review 4 - 37 ADD MATERIAL F1 softkey, Tool and Material Database screen 4 - 41 ADD TOOL F1 softkey, Tool and Material Database 4 - 41 Add Tool softkey, Tool and Material Database screen 4 - 41 Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 27 softkey 4 - 27 Air Pressure ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 15 machine diagnostics, HTCX500 5 - 11 Alt Dwell Lt Side, machine parameters 3 16 Alt Washdown Dwell, machine parameters 3 - 15 Alt Washdown Off Time, machine parameters 3 - 17 Angle field Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 29 APC 5 - 17 diagnostics 5 - 19 Machine Function screen 5 - 18 Manual Table Release lever 5 - 23 squaring the table 5 - 17 APC Diagnostics screen APC Pin 5 - 20 APC Position 5 - 20 APC Reference 5 - 20 ATC Status 5 - 20
Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Hydraulic Status 5 - 20 Pallet in Machine 5 - 20 Pallet Status 5 - 20 Z-Axis Position 5 - 20 APC panel Cancel Cycle pushbutton 5 - 22 Cycle Start pushbutton 5 - 22 Emergency Stop pushbutton 5 - 22 APC Pin, APC diagnostics 5 - 20 APC Position, APC diagnostics 5 - 20 APC Ready pushbutton 5 - 23 APC Reference, APC diagnostics 5 - 20 APC table, manual rotation 5 - 23 Append Tool and Material Database softkey, Import and Export 4 - 55 APPLICATION FONT SIZE, User Interface Settings 3 - 3 Apply Border To Z 4 - 16 arrow keys 1 - 14 ATC 1 - 30, 5 - 7 large tools 1 - 32 loading 1 - 31 tool removal 1 - 32 ATC & Machine Diagnostics Softkeys 5 - 16 ATC Axis Positions, ATC diagnostics, HTX500 5 - 12 ATC Diagnostics screen ATC Axis Positions, HTX500 5 - 12 ATC Door, HTX500 5 - 13 ATC Status, HTX500 5 - 12 Exchange Arm, HTX500 5 - 13 Hydraulic Status, HTX500 5 - 13 Magazine Position, HTX500 5 - 12 Magazine Status, HTX500 5 - 13 Spindle Status, HTX500 5 - 12 Tool Holder, HTX500 5 - 12 Tool in Spindle, HTX500 5 - 12 Z-Axis Position, HTX500 5 - 12 ATC Diagnostics softkeys ATC Door Open / Close F2, HTX500 5 13 Calibrate T/C Magazine F6, HTX500 5 14 Exchange Arm 0 / 90 F5, HTX500 5 13 Exchange Arm 180 F6, HTX500 5 - 13 Magazine CCW F4, HTX500 5 - 14 Magazine CW F3, HTX500 5 - 14 Move Axes to TC Position F1, HTX500 5 - 13 Move Z-Axis to Zero F2, HTX500 5 - 13 Orient Spindle F1, HTX500 5 - 13 Spindle Clamp / Unclamp F5, HTX500 5 - 13 Tool Holder 0 / 90 F3, HTX500 5 - 13
Index 1

704-0116-115

ATC Disable, machine parameters 3 - 22 ATC Door Open / Close F2, ATC diagnostics softkey, HTX500 5 - 13 ATC Door Open / Close softkey, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 16 ATC Door, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 15 ATC Door, ATC diagnostics, HTX500 5 - 13 ATC Input Fields, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 15 ATC OK to Stop, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 15 ATC Position field, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 15 ATC Status, APC diagnostics 5 - 20 ATC Status, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 15 ATC Status, ATC diagnostics, HTX500 5 12 ATC Status, machine diagnostics, HTX500 5 - 11 ATC Z Axis Position field, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 15 Auto Balance Enable, machine parameters 3 - 22 Auto console key 1 - 25 Auto Mode 4 - 61 Monitoring 5 - 29 Auto Set Restart Marker 5 - 28 Auto tab, Tool Library 4 - 39 Automatic Centerline Calculation 3 - 33 automatic pallet changer 5 - 17 automatic tool changer 5 - 7 40-taper 5 - 8 50-taper 5 - 9 AUTOMATIC TOOL MONITORING field, Probing Parameters 4 - 51 AUTOMATICALLY LOAD TOOLS INTO MTC, Tool Utilities and Settings 3 - 8 AutoSave Settings 3 - 34 softkey, Utilities screen 3 - 8 Aux Output Confirmation Enable, machine parameters 3 - 25 Aux Work Offsets LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 21 Auxiliary console key 1 - 14 Mode 3 - 1 Auxiliary Work Offsets 4 - 14 Axes Status field, DRO 4 - 12 axis control 1 - 16 select switch 1 - 18, 1 - 22 Axis Feed Rate dial 1 - 16

Axis Feedrate Override Min (%) parameter 3 - 29 Axis Limit Switches field Auto Mode 5 - 29 DRO 4 - 12 Axis, spindle, and machine control location on console 1 - 11 Axis, spindle, and machine control, location on console 1 - 12

B
B Centerline X/Y/Z field 4 - 9 B Offset softkey 4 - 57 Backup Config & Machine Files 3 - 3 softkey 3 - 2 Base 1 - 2 Baud Rate field, Serial Port Settings 3 - 32 Begin Reading from Port softkey, Serial I/O screen 3 - 39 Begin Writing to Port softkey, Serial I/O screen 3 - 39 Blend Offset field, Milling Parameters 4 - 45 Blend Overlap field, Milling Parameters 4 45 Block field Auto Mode 5 - 30 BORDER SIZE field 4 - 16 Bore Dwell field, Holes Parameters 4 - 50 Bore Orient Retract field, Holes Parameters 4 - 50 BOX LENGTH (X, Y, Z) field 4 - 15 BPRNT/DPRNT OUTPUT DEVICE, NC Settings 3 - 7 BPRNT/DPRNT OUTPUT FILE, NC Settings 3-7 brightness control 1 - 12 location on console 1 - 11 Bytes Transferred field, Serial I/O 3 - 39

C
C Centerline X/Y/Z field 4 - 9 C console key 1 - 14 CAL to LS Velocity A 3 - 21 CAL to LS Velocity X 3 - 21 Cal to LS Velocity, machine parameters 3 22 calculator 1 - 8 Calibrate Machine softkey, Manual Mode 5 4 Calibrate T/C Magazine F5 ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 16 ATC diagnostics softkeys, HTX500 5 14

2 - Index

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Calibrating the Machine 5 - 2 Cancel Cycle pushbutton, APC panel 5 - 22 CE Configuration field 4 - 62 CE Diagnostics softkey 4 - 62 CE Safety override mode 4 - 61 CE Status & Diagnostics screen 4 - 62 CE2000 4 - 61 Chamfer Angle field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 29 Change Access Code softkey 4 - 63 Change All Feeds Speeds & Tools softkey 4 - 56, 4 - 58 change feeds 4 - 58 Change Feeds & Speeds by Tool softkey 4 56, 4 - 58 Change Finish SFQ field 4 - 58 change program blocks 4 - 56 Change Rough SFQ field 4 - 58 change speeds 4 - 58 Change Surface Finish Quality 4 - 58 Change Tool field 4 - 58 Change Tool Number 4 - 34 softkey 4 - 34 Change Tool Number field 4 - 56 Change Tool Number softkey 4 - 27 Tool Library screen 4 - 40 change tools 4 - 58 Change Z-Start softkey 4 - 57 changing access code 4 - 63 Changing Feeds, Speeds, and Tools 4 - 58 Character Length field, Serial Port Settings 3 - 32 Check Calc Assist Inconsistencies, Conversational Settings 3 - 6 Check for Errors softkey, Auto Mode 5 - 28 Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time, machine parameters 3 - 26 Chip Conveyor On Delay Time, machine parameters 3 - 26 Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable, machine parameters 3 - 26 Chip Removal field Auto Mode 5 - 29 DRO 4 - 11 Chip Removal Forward On/Off softkey, Auto Mode 5 - 30 Chip Removal Forward On/Off softkey,manual mode 5 - 4 Chip Removal Reverse On/Off softkey, manual mode 5 - 5 CHIPLOAD field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 30 Choose as Replacement softkey 4 - 38 Chord Error field, General Parameters 4 43

CLEAR TOOLS F6 softkey, Tool Library screen 4 - 40 Collapse and Expand Files 1 - 6 COLOR field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 28 Column, machine component 1 - 2 Communications Panel 1 - 27 Compute Estimated Run Time softkey, Auto Mode 5 - 28 console 1 - 2, 1 - 3 console buttons Feed hold 1 - 24 motion control buttons 1 - 24 Motion hold 1 - 24 Console Jog Unit 1 - 12 console keys 1 - 4 Auto 1 - 25 C 1 - 14 Delete 1 - 14 End 1 - 14 Enter 1 - 14 F 1 - 14 Home 1 - 14 Insert 1 - 14 Interrupt cycle 1 - 25 Machine Mode 1 - 25 Machine Mode ,Single 1 - 25 Machine Mode ,Test 1 - 25 Machine Mode, Auto 1 - 25 Page Down 1 - 14 Page Up 1 - 14 Single 1 - 25 Test 1 - 25 console knobs Axis Feed Rate 1 - 16 Rapid Override 1 - 16 Spindle Speed 1 - 16 contrast control 1 - 12 control panel 1 - 11 Control Panel Function Groups 1 - 11 Control Power Off Time, machine parameters 3 - 20 Control Power Off Timer 5 - 32 Conversational Components 4 - 53 CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAM F1 softkey, Program Manager 2 - 2 CONVERSATIONAL SETTINGS, Utilities screen 3 - 6 CONVERT TO LINEAR F7 softkey, Program Review screen 4 - 60 CONVERT TO ROTARY F6 softkey, Program Review screen 4 - 60 Coolant Delay Time 3 - 12 machine parameters 3 - 14 Coolant field 4 - 23 Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 31
Index 3

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

coolant parameters, defined 3 - 13 Coolant Status, machine diagnostics, HTX500 5 - 11 Coolant Washdown On/Off softkey, Auto Mode 5 - 31 Copy and Change Blocks 4 - 56 Input screen 4 - 2 Copy Blocks softkey 4 - 56 COPY DIRECTORY softkey Disk Operations 2 - 5 copy program blocks 4 - 57 COPY softkey Disk Operations 2 - 6 Program Review screen 4 - 59 Copy Tool softkey 4 - 34 CREATE DIRECTORY softkey Disk Operations 2 - 6 cursor control 1 - 14 cursor control buttons, LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 21 Custom NC File Extension, NC Settings 3 7 CUT DIRECTORY softkey Disk Operations 2 - 5 CUT softkey Disk Operations 2 - 6 Program Review screen 4 - 59 Cutter Comp Param field, Milling Parameters 4 - 47 Cutting Edges field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 29 Cutting Time field, Tool Setup screen 4 - 24 Cycle Start pushbutton, APC panel 5 - 22

D
DB SEARCH F6 softkey, graphics screen 4 67 Default Pocket Overlap field, Milling Parameters 4 - 47 DEFAULT XML PROGRAM TYPE, Conversational Settings 3 - 6 Default Zoom softkey graphics screen 4 - 67 Delete Block softkey 4 - 60 Delete Blocks softkey 4 - 56 DELETE DIRECTORY softkey Disk Operations 2 - 6 Delete key 1 - 14 DELETE MATERIAL F3 softkey, Tool and Material Database screen 4 - 41 delete program blocks 4 - 57 Delete softkey Disk Operations 2 - 6 Program Review screen 4 - 60

Delete Sub Block softkey 4 - 60 DELETE TOOL F3 softkey, Tool and Material Database screen 4 - 41 Delete Tool softkey 4 - 25 Depletion Retract field, General Parameters 4 - 44 DESCRIPTION field, in Program Properties 2-4 Device field, Tool Measurement Settings 4 18 DIAGNOSTICS F3 softkey, Manual Mode 5 4 Diagnostics screen APC 5 - 19 Diagnostics softkey 4 - 62 Diameter field 4 - 22 Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 29 Diameter Tolerance field Probing Parameters 4 - 51 Diameter Wear field, Tool Setup screen 4 24 Digital Read Out 4 - 11 Direction field Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 28 Disable Auto On Chip Removal parameter 3 - 29 Disable Aux Out During Interrupt, machine parameters 3 - 25 Disable Tool Length Offset Table, NC Settings 3 - 7 Disable Tool Picker Option, machine parameters 3 - 20 Disk Operations 2 - 5 softkey, Program Manager 2 - 4 Display Machine Specifications softkey 3 2 DISPLAY UNITS field, in Program Properties 2-4 Display Warning Message, Tool Utilities and Settings 3 - 10 Display WinMax Configuration softkey 3 - 2 Door Lock Status field 4 - 62 Door Switch Status field 4 - 62 DRAW (PAUSE) softkey, graphics screen 4 - 66 DRAW OPTIONS softkey, graphics screen 4 - 66 Drill Angle field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 29 Drill Dwell field, Holes Parameters 4 - 50 drive jump 1 - 29 DRO 4 - 11 drop-down lists 1 - 6 Dry Run softkey, Auto Mode 5 - 28
Getting Started with WinMax Mill

4 - Index

704-0116-115

Dual 3 - 30 Dual Tool Probe Present parameter 3 - 30 Dual-Zone Machining 5 - 24

E
Edit Apt Parameters 4 - 33 Edit Lockout 3 - 4 Edit Lockout Level field 3 - 5 EDIT MATERIAL softkey, Tool and Material Database screen 4 - 41 EDIT MODE, User Interface Settings 3 - 4 EDIT TOOL softkey, Tool and Material Database screen 4 - 41 EIR Relay State field 4 - 62 Emergency APC panel 5 - 22 Emergency Stop 5 - 31 button 1 - 13 LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 21 location on console 1 - 11, 1 - 12 Emergency stop location on console 1 - 11 ENABLE AUTOMATIC SAVE, Autosave Settings 3 - 8 Enable Button 1 - 12 Enable button, LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 21 Enable Dual Zones 5 - 24 Enable Dual Zones parameter 3 - 20 Enable FTP Server field FTP Server Settings 3 - 33 ENABLE PROJECT RESTORE, User Interface Settings 3 - 4 Enable Reset at Program Start, NC Settings 3-8 ENABLE RUNTIME TOOL DISPLAY field, Graphics Settings 4 - 64 Enable Tool Life Monitoring, Tool Utilities and Settings 3 - 10 Enable Tool SFQ field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 32 Enable Variable Monitoring, NC Settings 3 7 End Block field 4 - 56, 4 - 58 End Block softkey 4 - 57 End key 1 - 14 Enter Access Code softkey 4 - 63 Enter key 1 - 14 entering the access code 4 - 63 Erase Functions 4 - 2 Input screen 4 - 2 ERASE PART SETUP softkey 4 - 2 ERASE PROGRAM softkey 4 - 2 ERASE TOOL SETUP softkey 4 - 2 Error History 3 - 40 European machines 1 - 2

Exchange Arm 0 / 90 F5, ATC diagnostics softkeys, HTX500 5 - 13 Exchange Arm 0 / 60, ATC & Machine Diagnostics 5 - 16 Exchange Arm 180 F6, ATC diagnostics softkeys, HTX500 5 - 13 Exchange Arm field, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 15 Exchange Arm Jog Reverse F4, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 16 Exchange Arm Rotate F5, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 16 Exchange Arm, ATC diagnostics, HTX500 5 - 13 Expand and Collapse Files 1 - 6 Export 4 - 55 EXPORT AUTO AND MANUAL TOOLS softkey, Import and Export 4 - 55 Export Log 3 - 42 Export Manual Tools List softkey, Import and Export 4 - 55 Export Tool and Material Database softkey, Import and Export 4 - 55 Exported NC Decimal Places field, NC Settings 3 - 7

F
F console key 1 - 14 F(%) field Auto Mode 5 - 29 DRO 4 - 12 Feed & Speed Optimization softkey, Auto Mode 5 - 27 Feed and Speed 4 - 30, 4 - 31 Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 30 Calculations 4 - 31 Feed field 4 - 24 Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 31 Auto Mode 5 - 29 DRO 4 - 11 Feed Hold console button 1 - 24 Feed/Flute (Tooth) field 4 - 24 Finish Feed (%) 4 - 46 Finish Plunge Helix Radius field, Helical Plunge Milling Parameters 4 - 49 Finish Plunge Ramp Slope field, Helical Plunge Milling Parameters 4 - 48 Finish Plunge Type field, Helical Plunge Milling Parameters 4 - 48 Finish SFQ field 4 - 58 Finish Speed (%) 4 - 46 Finish XY field, Milling Parameters 4 - 46 Finish Z field, Milling Parameters 4 - 47

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Index 5

First Peck Offset field, General Parameters 4 - 44 Fit to View softkey graphics screen 4 - 67 Flutes field 4 - 24 Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 29 formula Washdown Off Delay Timer 3 - 18 Washdown On Delay Timer 3 - 17 FTP Manager 2 - 6 FTP Manager softkey Disk Operations 2 - 6 FTP Server Port field, FTP Server Settings 3 - 33 FTP Server Settings softkey, Utilities screen 3 - 33 Full Precision Editing 1 - 5

ATC diagnostics, HTX500 5 - 13 Hydraulic Status, machine diagnostics, HTX500 5 - 11

I
icons A - xi Import / Export Functions 4 - 53 Import and Export 4 - 55 Import Functions Input screen 4 - 2 Import Into Manual Tool List softkey, Import and Export 4 - 55 Import Manual Tools, Import and Export 4 55 Import softkey 2 - 2 Importing NC States into Conversational Programs 4 - 54 indexer port 1 - 29 Input key 1 - 14 Input Mode 4 - 2 Insert Arc field, Milling Parameters 4 - 47 Insert Block / Sub Block Before softkey 4 60 Insert key 1 - 14 Insert Line field, Milling Parameters 4 - 48 INSERT TOOL F3 softkey, Tool Library screen 4 - 40 Integrator Configuration Parameters, N95 codes 3 - 19 INTEGRATOR SUPPORT SERIVICES F4 softkey, Utilities screen 3 - 35 Integrator Support Services 3 - 38 Interrupt console key 1 - 25 Interrupt Cycle Z Retract field, General Parameters 4 - 44

G
G05.3 Surface Finish Quality 4 - 32 Gauge Device setup, with Absolute Tool Length Mode 4 - 18 General Parameters 1 4 - 43 General Parameters 2 4 - 44 Geometry, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 28 Graphics 4 - 64 Graphics Chord Error field, Graphics Settings 4 - 65 Graphics screen, location on console 1 - 11 Graphics Settings 4 - 64 for Stock Geomety 4 - 15 softkey 4 - 64 softkey, graphics screen 4 - 67

H
hardware options 1 - 2 HD3 Save Program Type, Conversational Settings 3 - 6 Height field, Tool Measurement Settings 4 18 Help On-screen Help 1 - 9 Help key 1 - 14 HMX 3 - 11 HMX Machine Diagnostics 5 - 11 HMX pallet change 5 - 17 HMX630 tool magazine 5 - 10 Holes Parameters 4 - 50 Home key 1 - 14 HTX 3 - 11 HTX500 tool magazine 5 - 10 Hydraulic Status APC diagnostics 5 - 20

J
control buttons 1 - 17 parameters 1 - 19 Jog Feed Override 1 - 22 jog unit 1 - 17 jump drive 1 - 29 jog

K
keyboard 1 - 4, 1 - 8, 1 - 13 optional 1 - 15

6 - Index

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

L
Ladder File Configuration softkey 3 - 2 Language File Configuration softkey 3 - 2 Language Quick Toggle 3 - 34 Language Selection 3 - 34 large tools in the ATC magazine 1 - 32 LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 20 LCD screen, LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 21 Length of Cut field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 29 Limited Manual Operations field 4 - 62 List Control Rows field, User Interface Settings 3 - 4 List Icon Size field, User Interface Settings 3-4 Load softkey 2 - 2 Disk Operations 2 - 6 loading tool in the spindle 1 - 30 tools in ATC magazine 1 - 31 Location field 4 - 21 Log Files 3 - 35, 3 - 39

M
machine Auto mode key 1 - 25 components 1 - 2 control 1 - 16 control buttons 1 - 24 major components 1 - 2 mode console keys 1 - 25 Single mode console key 1 - 25 Test mode console key 1 - 25 Machine and Console Basics 1 - 1 Machine and Part Axes field, Auto Mode 5 29 Machine and Part Axes field, DRO 4 - 11 Machine Class field 3 - 2 Machine Components 1 - 2 Machine Coordinate Relative 3 - 33 machine coordinate system, part setup 4 5 Machine Diagnostics screen Air Pressure, HTX500 5 - 11 ATC Status,HTX500 5 - 11 Coolant Status, HTX500 5 - 11 Hydraulic Status, HTX500 5 - 11 Overload Status, HTX500 5 - 12 Spindle Chiller, HTX500 5 - 12 Spindle Status, HTX500 5 - 11 Tool in Spindle, HTX500 5 - 11 Way Lube Level, HTX500 5 - 11 MACHINE FUNCTION softkey 5 - 18 Machine Hour Meter field 3 - 2
Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Machine Operation Keys 1 - 12 Machine Operations 1 - 25 Machine operations, location on console 1 11 Machine Parameters 3 - 11 Alt Dwell Lt Side 3 - 16 Alt Washdown Dwell 3 - 15 Alt Washdown Off Time 3 - 17 ATC Disable 3 - 22 Auto Balance Enable 3 - 22 Aux Output Confirmation Enable 3 - 25 Axis Feedrate Override Min (%) 3 - 29 Cal to LS Velocity 3 - 22 CAL to LS Velocity A 3 - 21 CAL to LS Velocity X 3 - 21 Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time 3 - 26 Chip Conveyor On Delay Time 3 - 26 Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable 3 26 Control Power Off Time 3 - 20 Coolant Delay Time 3 - 12, 3 - 14 Disable Auto On Chip Removal 3 - 29 Disable Aux Out During Interrupt 3 - 25 Disable Tool Picker Option 3 - 20 Dual Tool Probe Present 3 - 30 Enable Dual Zones 3 - 20 Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC 3 - 26 Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable 3 - 14 Rapid Feedrate Override Min (%) 3 - 30 Rapid Override Disable 3 - 22 Tilt Axis Safety Position 3 - 23 Warm-Up Axis Feed Rate 3 - 28 Warm-up Axis Feed Rate 3 - 29 Warm-Up Cycle Time Per Pass 3 - 28 Warm-up Cycle Time Per Pass 3 - 29 Warm-Up Max Spindle Speed 3 - 28 Warm-up Max Spindle Speed 3 - 29 Warm-Up Speed Steps 3 - 28 Warm-up Speed Steps 3 - 29 Warm-Up Starting Speed 3 - 28 Warm-up Starting Speed 3 - 29 Washdown Off Delay Timer 3 - 12, 3 18 Washdown On Delay Timer 3 - 17 X-Axis Safety Position 3 - 21 Y-Axis Safety Position 3 - 21 Machine Specifications softkey Utilities screen 3 - 2 Magazine CCW F4, ATC diagnostics softkeys, HTX500 5 - 14 Magazine CCW F5, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 16

704-0116-115

Index 7

Magazine CW F3, ATC diagnostics softkeys, HTX500 5 - 14 Magazine CW, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 16 Magazine field, DRO 4 - 12 Magazine In Position, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 15 Magazine Lock, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 15 Magazine Pin Lock / Unlock F2, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 16 Magazine Position field, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 15 Magazine Position, ATC diagnostics, HTX500 5 - 12 Magazine Reference, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 15 Magazine Status, ATC diagnostics, HTX500 5 - 13 manual APC table rotation 5 - 23 Manual Border Sizing 4 - 16 Manual Border Sizing field 4 - 15 Manual console key 1 - 25 Manual Function Setup 5 - 4 softkey, Manual Mode 5 - 4 manual jog feed keys 1 - 18, 1 - 21 feed parameter 1 - 19 hand wheel 1 - 18, 1 - 21 hand wheel multiplier keys 1 - 18, 1 21 Manual Jog Feed field, Manual Mode 5 - 4 Manual Mode 4 - 61 LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 21 Tool Library 4 - 39 Manual Rapid Move 5 - 5 softkey, Manual Mode 5 - 4 Manual Spindle Speed field, Manual Mode 5-4 Manual Spindle Speed parameter 1 - 19 Manual Stock Sizing field 4 - 15 Manual tab, Tool Library 4 - 40 Manual Table Release lever, APC Table 5 23 Mark Tool Defective, Tool Utilities and Settings 3 - 10 Match Tools softkey Tool Review screen 4 - 37 Unmatched Tools Review 4 - 37 Matching tools 4 - 37 Material Database 4 - 41 Material field, in Program Properties 2 - 4 Math Assist Style, Conversational Settings 3-6

Max console console keys 1 - 12 panel group figure 1 - 12 panel groups 1 - 12 Max Depth field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 30 Max Memory Load field 3 - 4 Maximum Contouring Rate field 3 - 3 Maximum Diameter Difference, Tool Utilities and Settings 3 - 9 Maximum Idle Time (Mins) field FTP Server Settings 3 - 33 Maximum Rapid Traverse Rate field 3 - 3 Maximum Spindle Motor Speed field 3 - 2 Maximum Spindle Tool Speed field 3 - 2 Mill Plunge Helix Radius field, Helical Plunge Milling Parameters 4 - 48 Mill Plunge Ramp Slope field, Helical Plunge Milling Parameters 4 - 48 Mill Plunge Type field, Helical Plunge Milling Parameters 4 - 48 Milling Direction field, Milling Parameters 4 - 47 Milling Parameters 1 4 - 45 Milling Parameters 2 4 - 48 Minus/Plus A/B/C Direction Travel Limit field 3 - 3 Minus/Plus X Direction Travel Limit field 3 3 Minus/Plus Y Direction Travel Limit field 3 3 Mode 1 - 21 Mode Selector buttons, LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 21 Modify Dimensions 4 - 57 softkey 4 - 56 Monitored Variable Number, NC Settings 3-8 Motion Configuration softkey 3 - 2 Motion Hold button 1 - 24 Motion Hold button, LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 21 Move Axes to T/C Position softkey, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 16 Move Axes to TC Position F1, ATC diagnostics softkeys, HTX500 5 - 13 Move Blocks softkey 4 - 56 move program blocks 4 - 57 Move to Safe Pos During TC field, General Parameters 4 - 44 Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC, machine parameters 3 - 26 Move Tool To Spindle softkey, Tool Library screen 4 - 39, 4 - 40

8 - Index

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Move Z-Axis to T/C Height F6, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 16 Move Z-Axis to Zero Position F2, ATC diagnostics softkeys, HTX500 5 - 13 Move Z-Axis to Zero, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 16 Multiple Block Functions softkey, Program Review screen 4 - 59

N
N95 Codes (Integrator Configuration Parameters) 3 - 19 NAME field, in Program Properties 2 - 4 NC dialect 2 - 4 NC Dialect field, NC Settings 3 - 7 NC Display Type, NC Settings 3 - 7 NC Monitor softkey Auto Mode 5 - 31 NC/Conversational Merge 5 - 29 NC Program softkey, Program Manager 2 2 NC Settings softkey, Utilities screen 3 - 7 NC SFQ, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 32 NC States 4 - 53 NC Variables 4 - 54 Neck Diameter field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 29 network 1 - 27 network ports 1 - 29 New Feed field 4 - 56, 4 - 58 New Finish Tool field 4 - 56, 4 - 58 New Plunge Feed field 4 - 56, 4 - 58 New softkey, Program Manager 2 - 2 New Speed (RPM) field 4 - 56, 4 - 58 New Tool field 4 - 56, 4 - 58 Next Tool Change softkey, graphics screen 4 - 66 Next Tool field, Tool Library screen 4 - 39 Notes field, Tool Measurement Settings 4 18 Notes, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 33 Number of Axes Present field 3 - 2 numeric keypad 1 - 15

DRO 4 - 11 optional keyboard 1 - 15 Optional Stop On/Off softkey, Auto Mode 5 - 30 options hardware and software 1 - 2 Orient Spindle F1, ATC diagnostics softkeys, HTX500 5 - 13 Orient Spindle softkey, Manual Mode 5 - 4 Orient Spindle, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 16 Orientation field, DRO 4 - 11 orientation hole 1 - 30 orientation key 1 - 30 Overload Status, machine diagnostics, HTX500 5 - 12 override knobs 1 - 16 Override Lockout field, General Parameters 4 - 43 Overwrite Existing Zero Calibration, Tool Utilities and Settings 3 - 9

P
Page Down key 1 - 14 Page Up key 1 - 14 pallet changer 5 - 17 Manual Table Release lever 5 - 23 manual table rotation 5 - 23 pallet diagnostics APC Pin 5 - 20 APC Position 5 - 20 APC Reference 5 - 20 ATC Status 5 - 20 Hydraulic Status 5 - 20 Pallet in Machine 5 - 20 Pallet Status 5 - 20 Z-Axis Position 5 - 20 Pallet in Machine, APC diagnostics 5 - 20 Pallet Status, APC diagnostics 5 - 20 Pan softkey graphics screen 4 - 67 parameters jog unit 1 - 19 manual jog feed 1 - 19 manual spindle speed 1 - 19 Parity field, Serial Port Settings 3 - 32 Park Machine 5 - 32 softkey, Manual Mode 5 - 4 Part Count field, Auto Mode 5 - 30 Part Fixturing and Tool Loading 4 - 13 Part Inspection files 3 - 38 Part Kinematics Z Reference 3 - 33, 4 - 18

O
Offset Z field 4 - 9, 4 - 20 On-screen Help 1 - 9 Open softkey 2 - 2 operating the APC 5 - 18 Operator Specify Pocket Start field, Helical Plunge Milling Parameters 4 - 49 Opt Stop On (Off) field Auto Mode 5 - 29

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Index 9

part program printing 3 - 35 Part Program Printing softkey 3 - 35 Part Program Tool Review 4 - 34 softkey 4 - 27, 4 - 60 Part Program Tool Review Softkeys 4 - 36 Part Program Tool Review, NC Programs 4 35 Part Programming Input screen 4 - 2 softkey 4 - 25, 4 - 60 softkey, Tool Review screen 4 - 36 Part Setup 4 - 3 Calculate Rotary Offsets 4 - 12 fields 4 - 9 LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 21 Orient Spindle 4 - 12 Part Probing 4 - 12 Part Programming 4 - 12 Program Parameters 4 - 12 softkey 4 - 25, 4 - 60 softkey, Tool Review screen 4 - 36 Stock Geometry 4 - 12 Store Machine Position 4 - 12 Toggle Units 4 - 12 Tool Setup 4 - 12 Work Offsets 4 - 12 Part Setup softkeys 4 - 12 Part Surface field, Graphics Settings 4 - 64 Part Zero A / B field 4 - 9 Part Zero X / Y fields 4 - 9 Part Zero Z field 4 - 9 Part Zero Z Shift field 4 - 9 Password field FTP Server Settings 3 - 33 Paste Into Directory softkey Disk Operations 2 - 5 Paste softkey Disk Operations 2 - 6 Program Review screen 4 - 59 PATH field in Program Properties 2 - 4 Path field FTP Server Settings 3 - 33 Peck Clearance Plane field, General Parameters 4 - 43 Peck Depth field Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 31 Performance Parameters 4 - 52 Plunge Feed field Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 31 Plunges field, Graphics Settings 4 - 64 Pocket Plunge Near Center field, Milling 2 Parameters 4 - 49 pop-ups 1 - 7
10 - Index

port pin descriptions 1 - 28 USB 1 - 29 Power Drawbar 1 - 2 Power On button 1 - 24 location on console 1 - 11, 1 - 12 Printing Part Program 3 - 35 Probing Data 3 - 38 Printing Setup 3 - 35 softkey, in Utilities screen 3 - 35 Probing Data Printing 3 - 38 softkey 3 - 35 Probing Parameters 4 - 51 Program Manager 2 - 1 Input screen 4 - 2 Program Parameters 4 - 42 Input screen 4 - 2 Program Parameters softkey 4 - 27, 4 - 60 Tool Review screen 4 - 36 Program Properties 2 - 4 Program Review screen 4 - 59 Program Run Time field Auto Mode 5 - 29 DRO 4 - 11 PROGRAM TYPE, in Program Properties 2 4 Programming Keyboard, location on console 1 - 11, 1 - 12 programming mode keys 1 - 14 Protocol field, Serial Port Settings 3 - 32 Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable, machine parameters 3 - 14 Put Block Before field 4 - 56

R
R(%) field, Auto Mode 5 - 29 R(%) field, DRO 4 - 12 Radius field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 29 Rapid Feedrate Override Min (%) parameter 3 - 30 Rapid Override dial 1 - 16 Rapid Override Disable, machine parameters 3 - 22 Rapid Traverse field, General Parameters 4 - 43 RAPIDS field, Graphics Settings 4 - 64 Ream Chamfer field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 29 Recovery and Restart 5 - 3 Recovery Restart softkey, Auto Mode 5 - 28 Remote jog location on console 1 - 11

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

remote jog unit 1 - 17 remote jog unit 1 - 17 removing tools from the ATC 1 - 32 RENAME DIRECTORY F5 softkey Disk Operations 2 - 6 RENAME F4 softkey Disk Operations 2 - 6 Replace Tool and Material Database softkey, Import and Export 4 - 55 Reset Control 5 - 3 Reset End Marker Auto Mode 5 - 28 Reset Part Count softkey, Auto Mode 5 - 30 RESET PROGRAM PARAMETERS F3 4 - 2 Reset Restart Marker 5 - 28 Reset Servos and Spindle softkey, Manual Mode 5 - 4 restart after emergency stop 1 - 13 Restart Control 5 - 33 Utilities screen 3 - 35, 5 - 33 Restart Markers, NC 5 - 28 Restore Config & Machine Files 3 - 3 softkey 3 - 2 RESTORE USER DEFAULTS F5 softkey, Program Parameters 4 - 42 RESTORE WINMAX DEFAULTS F6 softkey, Program Parameters 4 - 42 Retain Probed Part Setup field, Probing Parameters 4 - 51 Retract Clearance field, General Parameters 4 - 43 Retract Tool softkey, Manual Mode 5 - 4 Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files 3 - 41 Review key 1 - 14 Review Mode 4 - 59 Review, Tools in Part Program 4 - 34 Rotary Axes Parameters 3 - 33, 4 - 18 Rotary Axis ISO Standard 3 - 33 Rotary Centerline X/Y/Z 3 - 33 Rotary Jog Feed, Manual Mode 5 - 4 ROTATE F5 softkey, graphics screen 4 - 67 Rough SFQ field 4 - 58 RS-232 C serial communications 1 - 27 serial port 1 - 28 Run Program softkey, Auto Mode 5 - 29

S
S(%) field Auto Mode 5 - 29 DRO 4 - 12 safety CE safety circuit switches 4 - 61

override mode 4 - 61 Safety Work Region field 4 - 10 SAVE 2 - 3 SAVE ACTIVE PROGRAM ONLY, Autosave Settings 3 - 8 SAVE AS 2 - 3 SAVE AS USER DEFAULTS F4 softkey, Program Parameters 4 - 42 SAVE FREQUENCY, Autosave Settings 3 - 8 Save NC State with Program, NC Settings 3-7 Save to Database softkey 4 - 38 screen CE Status & Diagnostics 4 - 62 Screen Configuration, User Interface Settings 3 - 3 SCREENSAVER TIMEOUT, User Interface Settings 3 - 4 Select DRO softkey, Auto Mode 5 - 30 SELECT LANGUAGE softkey, Utilities screen 3 - 34 SELECT MATERIAL FOR PART PROGRAM F5 softkey, Tool and Material Database screen 4 - 41 Select Surface 4 - 52 SELECT VIEW F2 softkey, graphics screen 4 - 66 SelectSurface Finish Quality 4 - 42, 4 - 52 Serial I/O 3 - 35, 3 - 39 Serial Numbers Printing softkey 3 - 35 Serial Port Settings 3 - 32 SERIAL PORT SETTINGS F1 softkey, Utilities screen 3 - 3 serial ports 1 - 28 Servo Power 5 - 2 Set End Marker Auto Mode 5 - 28 Set Length Using Touch-Off Device softkey 4 - 26 Set Restart Marker 5 - 28 Set Tool Zero softkey 4 - 25 Set Tool Zero Using Gauge Block softkey 4 26 SFQ 4 - 52 Shank Diameter field 4 - 22 Shank Diameter field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 29 shift offset 4 - 13 SHOW ALL FILE TYPES, User Interface Settings 3 - 4 SHOW GRAPHICS field, Graphics Settings 4 - 64 Show Roughing Tool Path for 2D Surfaces field, Graphics Settings 4 - 64
Index 11

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

SHOW Roughing Tool Path for 3D Surfaces field, Graphics Settings 4 - 64 Shutdown Control 5 - 33 SHUTDOWN CONTROL F6 softkey, Utilities screen 3 - 35 SHUTDOWN CONTROL softkey Utilities screen 5 - 33 Single console key 1 - 25 single key 1 - 25 SINGLE STEP F3 softkey, graphics screen 4 - 66 Smoothing Tolerance 4 - 52 SNAPSHOT F7 softkey, graphics screen 4 67 SOFTKEY MENU POSITION, User Interface Settings 3 - 4 softkeys 1 - 4, 1 - 5, 1 - 13 software options 1 - 2 Software Options softkey 3 - 2 Software Version softkey 3 - 2 special function keys 1 - 14 Speed (RPM) field 4 - 23 SPEED field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 31 Spindle 1 - 2, 1 - 30 spindle control 1 - 16 manual speed 1 - 19 tool removal 1 - 30 Spindle Chiller, machine diagnostics, HTX500 5 - 12 Spindle Clamp / Unclamp F5, ATC diagnostics softkeys, HTX500 5 - 13 Spindle Clamp, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 15 Spindle Clamp/Unclamp F4 5 - 16 Spindle field Auto Mode 5 - 29 DRO 4 - 11 Spindle Load Monitor field, Auto Mode 5 29 Spindle Motor 1 - 2 Spindle Orientation, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 15 Spindle Speed dial 1 - 16 Spindle Status, ATC diagnostics, HTX500 5 - 12 Spindle Status, machine diagnostics, HTX500 5 - 11 Spindle tab, Tool Library 4 - 39 Spindle Unclamp button 1 - 30 Spindle Unclamp PB, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 15 squaring the APC table 5 - 17 Standard Calculator 3 - 6 Start Block field 4 - 56, 4 - 58
12 - Index

Start Block softkey 4 - 57 Start Coordinate Reference, Probing Parameters 4 - 51 Start Cycle console button 1 - 24 Start Marker, NC 5 - 28 Start Pushbutton, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 15 Status Bar 1 - 8 Status field, Serial I/O 3 - 39 Status History 3 - 41 Stock Allowance Mode, Milling Parameters 4 - 46 Stock Geometry 4 - 15 Part Setup 4 - 15 Stock Geometry screen Apply Border to Z 4 - 16 BORDER SIZE 4 - 16 MANUAL BORDER SIZING 4 - 15 Manual Border Sizing 4 - 16 MANUAL STOCK SIZING 4 - 15 STOCK TYPE 4 - 15 X REF POSITION 4 - 15 X/Y/Z Length 4 - 15 Y REF POSITION 4 - 15 Z REF POSITION 4 - 15 ZERO REF 4 - 15 STOCK OUTLINE field, Graphics Settings 4 - 64 STOCK OUTLINE, Graphics Settings 4 - 15 Stock Transparency field, Graphics Settings 4 - 64 STOCK TYPE field 4 - 15 Stop Bits field, Serial Port Settings 3 - 32 Stop Cycle button, LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 21 Stop Cycle console button 1 - 24 Store Position key 1 - 18, 1 - 21 Stylus Length field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 29 Supplier, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 33 Surface Finish Quality 4 - 52 G05.3 4 - 32 Surface Speed field Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 30 FPM 4 - 24 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION F1 softkey, Utilities screen 3 - 2

T
Table 1 - 2 Tap Retract (%) field, Holes Parameters 4 50 Test console key 1 - 25 Test key 1 - 25

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Text screen 1 - 14 location on console 1 - 11 Thread Diameter field 4 - 23 Thread Diameter field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 29 Threads per inch field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 29 Tilt Axis Preference 3 - 33 Tilt Axis Safety Position, machine parameters 3 - 23 time 1 - 8 Tip Angle field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 29 Tip Diameter field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 29 Tip Length field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 29 Toggle Edit Lockout State softkey 3 - 1, 3 4 Toggle Language 3 - 34 Toggle Rapid Override Enable softkey, Auto Mode 5 - 31 tool holder, orientation hole 1 - 30 in Spindle 1 - 30 loading, machine spindle 1 - 30 removal from ATC magazine 1 - 32 removal from spindle 1 - 30 Tool & Material Library 4 - 39 Tool and Material Database 4 - 41 Tool Cal Length field 4 - 22 Tool Calibration Mode field, Tool Utilities and Settings 3 - 8 Tool Change Optimization field, General Parameters 4 - 44 Tool Change Review Screen softkey Tool Review Screen 4 - 36 tool changer 1 - 30 orientation key 1 - 30 tool changer (see Automatic Tool Changer) 5-7 Tool Geometry 4 - 28 Tool Holder 5 - 15 ATC diagnostics, HTX500 5 - 12 Tool Holder 0 / 90 F3, ATC diagnostics softkeys, HTX500 5 - 13 Tool Holder Up / Down, ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 16 Tool Home softkey 4 - 25 Tool in Spindle ATC diagnostics, HTX500 5 - 12 machine diagnostics, HTX500 5 - 11 Tool in Spindle field Auto Mode 5 - 29 DRO 4 - 11

TOOL IN SPINDLE field, Tool Library screen 4 - 39 Tool Information Printing softkey 3 - 35 Tool Length field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 29 Tool Library 4 - 39 Auto 4 - 39 Manual 4 - 39, 4 - 40 Spindle 4 - 39 tool magazine HMX630 5 - 10 HTX5000 5 - 10 VTXU 5 - 10 Tool Management softkey, Manual Mode 5 4 Tool Matching 4 - 37 Results 4 - 38 Tool Measurement 4 - 18 Tool Measurement screen 4 - 18 Tool Measurement Settings softkey 4 - 27 Tool Number field 4 - 21 Tool Offsets softkey 4 - 25 TOOL PATH field, Graphics Settings 4 - 64 Tool Pocket 5 - 15 Tool Probing softkey 4 - 27 TOOL REVIEW Input Screen 4 - 2 Tool Setup 4 - 21 LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 21 Tool Setup Fields 4 - 21, 4 - 24 Coolant 4 - 23 Cutting Time 4 - 24 Diameter 4 - 22 Diameter Wear 4 - 24 Feed 4 - 24 Feed/Flute (Tooth) 4 - 24 Flutes 4 - 24 Location 4 - 21 Shank Diameter 4 - 22 Speed (RPM) 4 - 23 Surface Speed (FPM) 4 - 24 Thread Diameter 4 - 23 Tool Cal Length 4 - 22 Tool Number 4 - 21 Tool Type 4 - 22 Touch-Off Device 4 - 22 TPI (or PITCH) 4 - 23 Zero Calibration 4 - 22 Tool Setup softkey Tool Review screen 4 - 36 Tool Setup Softkeys 4 - 25, 4 - 27 Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 27 Change Tool Number 4 - 27 Delete Tool 4 - 25
Index 13

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Part Program Tool Review 4 - 27 Part Programming 4 - 25 Part Setup 4 - 25 Program Parameters 4 - 27 Set Length Using Touch-Off Device 4 26 Set Tool Zero 4 - 25 Set Tool Zero Using Gauge Block 4 - 26 Tool Home 4 - 25 Tool Measurement Settings 4 - 27 Tool Offsets 4 - 25 Tool Probing 4 - 27 Tool Type field 4 - 22 Tool Type Setup/Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 41 Tool Utilities and Settings 3 - 8 Toolpath and Solid Graphics 4 - 66 Toolpath Graphics 4 - 66 Touch-Off Device field 4 - 22 Tool Measurement Settings 4 - 18 touchscreen 1 - 4 Touchscreen softkeys, location on console 1 - 11 TPI (or PITCH) field 4 - 23 Trackball, location on console 1 - 11 Transfer 2 - 6 transfer files jump drive 1 - 29

V
Variable Reset Value, NC Settings 3 - 8 Vertical/Horizontal field 3 - 2 VTX 3 - 11 VTXU tool magazine 5 - 10 VTXZ 5 - 24

W
Warm Up Machine softkey, Manual Mode 5-4 Warming Up the Machine 5 - 2 Warm-Up Axis Feed Rate 3 - 28, 3 - 29 Warm-Up Cycle Time Per Pass 3 - 28, 3 29 Warm-Up Max Spindle Speed 3 - 28 Warm-up Max Spindle Speed 3 - 29 Warm-Up Speed Steps 3 - 28, 3 - 29 Warm-Up Starting Speed 3 - 28, 3 - 29 WARN BEFORE SAVING IN OLD FORMAT, User Interface Settings 3 - 4 washdown Y-axis rear way cover 3 - 13 Washdown Coolant On/Off softkey, Manual Mode 5 - 5 Washdown Off Delay Timer 3 - 12, 3 - 18 recommended formula 3 - 18 Washdown On Delay Timer 3 - 17 recommended formula 3 - 17 Way Cover 1 - 2 Way Lube Level ATC and machine diagnostics 5 - 15 machine diagnostics, HTX500 5 - 11 WinMax Configuration softkey Utilities screen 3 - 2 WinMax IP Address softkey 3 - 2 WINMAX UPTIME F3 softkey, Utilities screen 3 - 33 Work Offsets 4 - 13 LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 21 Worklight On/Off softkey Auto Mode 5 - 31 Manual Mode 5 - 5 workpiece coordinate system, part setup 4-5 WRITE PROTECTION field, in Program Properties 2 - 4

U
Ultimax 4 and Max consoles 1 - 3 Ultimax classic edit mode 1 - 4 Ultimax Classic Math Assist 3 - 6 unit of measure 1 - 8 UNLOAD PROGRAM F5 4 - 2 unrotated coordinate system, part setup 4-5 USB Port 1 - 12 USB port 1 - 29 USE CHORD ERROR FROM PROGRAM field, Graphics Settings 4 - 65 Use Editing File softkey, Auto Mode 5 - 27 USE TOOL TYPE CHECKING, Tool Utilities and Settings 3 - 8 User defined value 4 - 31 USER INTERFACE SETTTINGS softkey, Utilities screen 3 - 3 User Name field, FTP Server Settings 3 - 33 USER PREFERENCES softkey, Utilities screen 3 - 3 Utilities 3 - 1

X
X Offset softkey 4 - 57 X REF POSITION field 4 - 15 X-Axis Safety Position 3 - 21

14 - Index

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Y
Y Offset softkey 4 - 57 Y REF POSITION field 4 - 15 Y-axis rear way cover washdown on and off cycles 3 - 13 Y-Axis Safety Position 3 - 21

Z
Z Location field, Tool Measurement Settings 4 - 18 Z Offset softkey 4 - 57 Z REF POSITION field 4 - 15 Z Reference position, setting 4 - 18 Z Reference, Tool Measurement Settings 4 - 18 Z Table Offset Part Setup 4 - 11 Z-Axis Position APC diagnostics 5 - 20 ATC diagnostics, HTX500 5 - 12 Z-Axis Servo 1 - 2 ZERO CAL (LENGTH) TOLERANCE field, Probing Parameters 4 - 51 Zero Calibration field 4 - 22 Zero Calibration Mode 4 - 20 ZERO REF field 4 - 15 Zone field Auto Mode Monitoring screen 5 - 29 DRO 4 - 11 ZOOM F3 softkey, graphics screen 4 - 67 ZOOM IN softkey graphics screen 4 - 67 ZOOM OUT softkey graphics screen 4 - 67

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-115

Index 15

- 16 Index

704-0116-115

Getting Started with WinMax Mill